8767 lines
310 KiB
TypeScript
8767 lines
310 KiB
TypeScript
/*!-----------------------------------------------------------
|
|
* Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
|
|
* Type definitions for monaco-editor
|
|
* Released under the MIT license
|
|
*-----------------------------------------------------------*/
|
|
/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
* Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
|
|
* Licensed under the MIT License. See License.txt in the project root for license information.
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
|
|
|
|
declare let MonacoEnvironment: monaco.Environment | undefined;
|
|
|
|
interface Window {
|
|
MonacoEnvironment?: monaco.Environment | undefined;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco {
|
|
|
|
export type Thenable<T> = PromiseLike<T>;
|
|
|
|
export interface Environment {
|
|
globalAPI?: boolean;
|
|
baseUrl?: string;
|
|
getWorker?(workerId: string, label: string): Promise<Worker> | Worker;
|
|
getWorkerUrl?(workerId: string, label: string): string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IDisposable {
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IEvent<T> {
|
|
(listener: (e: T) => any, thisArg?: any): IDisposable;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A helper that allows to emit and listen to typed events
|
|
*/
|
|
export class Emitter<T> {
|
|
constructor();
|
|
readonly event: IEvent<T>;
|
|
fire(event: T): void;
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
export enum MarkerTag {
|
|
Unnecessary = 1,
|
|
Deprecated = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum MarkerSeverity {
|
|
Hint = 1,
|
|
Info = 2,
|
|
Warning = 4,
|
|
Error = 8
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class CancellationTokenSource {
|
|
constructor(parent?: CancellationToken);
|
|
get token(): CancellationToken;
|
|
cancel(): void;
|
|
dispose(cancel?: boolean): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CancellationToken {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A flag signalling is cancellation has been requested.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly isCancellationRequested: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event which fires when cancellation is requested. This event
|
|
* only ever fires `once` as cancellation can only happen once. Listeners
|
|
* that are registered after cancellation will be called (next event loop run),
|
|
* but also only once.
|
|
*
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onCancellationRequested: (listener: (e: any) => any, thisArgs?: any, disposables?: IDisposable[]) => IDisposable;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Uniform Resource Identifier (Uri) http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3986.
|
|
* This class is a simple parser which creates the basic component parts
|
|
* (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3986#section-3) with minimal validation
|
|
* and encoding.
|
|
*
|
|
* ```txt
|
|
* foo://example.com:8042/over/there?name=ferret#nose
|
|
* \_/ \______________/\_________/ \_________/ \__/
|
|
* | | | | |
|
|
* scheme authority path query fragment
|
|
* | _____________________|__
|
|
* / \ / \
|
|
* urn:example:animal:ferret:nose
|
|
* ```
|
|
*/
|
|
export class Uri implements UriComponents {
|
|
static isUri(thing: any): thing is Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* scheme is the 'http' part of 'http://www.example.com/some/path?query#fragment'.
|
|
* The part before the first colon.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly scheme: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* authority is the 'www.example.com' part of 'http://www.example.com/some/path?query#fragment'.
|
|
* The part between the first double slashes and the next slash.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly authority: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* path is the '/some/path' part of 'http://www.example.com/some/path?query#fragment'.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly path: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* query is the 'query' part of 'http://www.example.com/some/path?query#fragment'.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly query: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* fragment is the 'fragment' part of 'http://www.example.com/some/path?query#fragment'.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly fragment: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns a string representing the corresponding file system path of this Uri.
|
|
* Will handle UNC paths, normalizes windows drive letters to lower-case, and uses the
|
|
* platform specific path separator.
|
|
*
|
|
* * Will *not* validate the path for invalid characters and semantics.
|
|
* * Will *not* look at the scheme of this Uri.
|
|
* * The result shall *not* be used for display purposes but for accessing a file on disk.
|
|
*
|
|
*
|
|
* The *difference* to `Uri#path` is the use of the platform specific separator and the handling
|
|
* of UNC paths. See the below sample of a file-uri with an authority (UNC path).
|
|
*
|
|
* ```ts
|
|
const u = Uri.parse('file://server/c$/folder/file.txt')
|
|
u.authority === 'server'
|
|
u.path === '/shares/c$/file.txt'
|
|
u.fsPath === '\\server\c$\folder\file.txt'
|
|
```
|
|
*
|
|
* Using `Uri#path` to read a file (using fs-apis) would not be enough because parts of the path,
|
|
* namely the server name, would be missing. Therefore `Uri#fsPath` exists - it's sugar to ease working
|
|
* with URIs that represent files on disk (`file` scheme).
|
|
*/
|
|
get fsPath(): string;
|
|
with(change: {
|
|
scheme?: string;
|
|
authority?: string | null;
|
|
path?: string | null;
|
|
query?: string | null;
|
|
fragment?: string | null;
|
|
}): Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Creates a new Uri from a string, e.g. `http://www.example.com/some/path`,
|
|
* `file:///usr/home`, or `scheme:with/path`.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param value A string which represents an Uri (see `Uri#toString`).
|
|
*/
|
|
static parse(value: string, _strict?: boolean): Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Creates a new Uri from a file system path, e.g. `c:\my\files`,
|
|
* `/usr/home`, or `\\server\share\some\path`.
|
|
*
|
|
* The *difference* between `Uri#parse` and `Uri#file` is that the latter treats the argument
|
|
* as path, not as stringified-uri. E.g. `Uri.file(path)` is **not the same as**
|
|
* `Uri.parse('file://' + path)` because the path might contain characters that are
|
|
* interpreted (# and ?). See the following sample:
|
|
* ```ts
|
|
const good = Uri.file('/coding/c#/project1');
|
|
good.scheme === 'file';
|
|
good.path === '/coding/c#/project1';
|
|
good.fragment === '';
|
|
const bad = Uri.parse('file://' + '/coding/c#/project1');
|
|
bad.scheme === 'file';
|
|
bad.path === '/coding/c'; // path is now broken
|
|
bad.fragment === '/project1';
|
|
```
|
|
*
|
|
* @param path A file system path (see `Uri#fsPath`)
|
|
*/
|
|
static file(path: string): Uri;
|
|
static from(components: {
|
|
scheme: string;
|
|
authority?: string;
|
|
path?: string;
|
|
query?: string;
|
|
fragment?: string;
|
|
}): Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Join a Uri path with path fragments and normalizes the resulting path.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param uri The input Uri.
|
|
* @param pathFragment The path fragment to add to the Uri path.
|
|
* @returns The resulting Uri.
|
|
*/
|
|
static joinPath(uri: Uri, ...pathFragment: string[]): Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Creates a string representation for this Uri. It's guaranteed that calling
|
|
* `Uri.parse` with the result of this function creates an Uri which is equal
|
|
* to this Uri.
|
|
*
|
|
* * The result shall *not* be used for display purposes but for externalization or transport.
|
|
* * The result will be encoded using the percentage encoding and encoding happens mostly
|
|
* ignore the scheme-specific encoding rules.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param skipEncoding Do not encode the result, default is `false`
|
|
*/
|
|
toString(skipEncoding?: boolean): string;
|
|
toJSON(): UriComponents;
|
|
static revive(data: UriComponents | Uri): Uri;
|
|
static revive(data: UriComponents | Uri | undefined): Uri | undefined;
|
|
static revive(data: UriComponents | Uri | null): Uri | null;
|
|
static revive(data: UriComponents | Uri | undefined | null): Uri | undefined | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface UriComponents {
|
|
scheme: string;
|
|
authority: string;
|
|
path: string;
|
|
query: string;
|
|
fragment: string;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Virtual Key Codes, the value does not hold any inherent meaning.
|
|
* Inspired somewhat from https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/dd375731(v=vs.85).aspx
|
|
* But these are "more general", as they should work across browsers & OS`s.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum KeyCode {
|
|
DependsOnKbLayout = -1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Placed first to cover the 0 value of the enum.
|
|
*/
|
|
Unknown = 0,
|
|
Backspace = 1,
|
|
Tab = 2,
|
|
Enter = 3,
|
|
Shift = 4,
|
|
Ctrl = 5,
|
|
Alt = 6,
|
|
PauseBreak = 7,
|
|
CapsLock = 8,
|
|
Escape = 9,
|
|
Space = 10,
|
|
PageUp = 11,
|
|
PageDown = 12,
|
|
End = 13,
|
|
Home = 14,
|
|
LeftArrow = 15,
|
|
UpArrow = 16,
|
|
RightArrow = 17,
|
|
DownArrow = 18,
|
|
Insert = 19,
|
|
Delete = 20,
|
|
Digit0 = 21,
|
|
Digit1 = 22,
|
|
Digit2 = 23,
|
|
Digit3 = 24,
|
|
Digit4 = 25,
|
|
Digit5 = 26,
|
|
Digit6 = 27,
|
|
Digit7 = 28,
|
|
Digit8 = 29,
|
|
Digit9 = 30,
|
|
KeyA = 31,
|
|
KeyB = 32,
|
|
KeyC = 33,
|
|
KeyD = 34,
|
|
KeyE = 35,
|
|
KeyF = 36,
|
|
KeyG = 37,
|
|
KeyH = 38,
|
|
KeyI = 39,
|
|
KeyJ = 40,
|
|
KeyK = 41,
|
|
KeyL = 42,
|
|
KeyM = 43,
|
|
KeyN = 44,
|
|
KeyO = 45,
|
|
KeyP = 46,
|
|
KeyQ = 47,
|
|
KeyR = 48,
|
|
KeyS = 49,
|
|
KeyT = 50,
|
|
KeyU = 51,
|
|
KeyV = 52,
|
|
KeyW = 53,
|
|
KeyX = 54,
|
|
KeyY = 55,
|
|
KeyZ = 56,
|
|
Meta = 57,
|
|
ContextMenu = 58,
|
|
F1 = 59,
|
|
F2 = 60,
|
|
F3 = 61,
|
|
F4 = 62,
|
|
F5 = 63,
|
|
F6 = 64,
|
|
F7 = 65,
|
|
F8 = 66,
|
|
F9 = 67,
|
|
F10 = 68,
|
|
F11 = 69,
|
|
F12 = 70,
|
|
F13 = 71,
|
|
F14 = 72,
|
|
F15 = 73,
|
|
F16 = 74,
|
|
F17 = 75,
|
|
F18 = 76,
|
|
F19 = 77,
|
|
F20 = 78,
|
|
F21 = 79,
|
|
F22 = 80,
|
|
F23 = 81,
|
|
F24 = 82,
|
|
NumLock = 83,
|
|
ScrollLock = 84,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the ';:' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Semicolon = 85,
|
|
/**
|
|
* For any country/region, the '+' key
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '=+' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Equal = 86,
|
|
/**
|
|
* For any country/region, the ',' key
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the ',<' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Comma = 87,
|
|
/**
|
|
* For any country/region, the '-' key
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '-_' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Minus = 88,
|
|
/**
|
|
* For any country/region, the '.' key
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '.>' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Period = 89,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '/?' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Slash = 90,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '`~' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Backquote = 91,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '[{' key
|
|
*/
|
|
BracketLeft = 92,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the '\|' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Backslash = 93,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the ']}' key
|
|
*/
|
|
BracketRight = 94,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
* For the US standard keyboard, the ''"' key
|
|
*/
|
|
Quote = 95,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used for miscellaneous characters; it can vary by keyboard.
|
|
*/
|
|
OEM_8 = 96,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Either the angle bracket key or the backslash key on the RT 102-key keyboard.
|
|
*/
|
|
IntlBackslash = 97,
|
|
Numpad0 = 98,
|
|
Numpad1 = 99,
|
|
Numpad2 = 100,
|
|
Numpad3 = 101,
|
|
Numpad4 = 102,
|
|
Numpad5 = 103,
|
|
Numpad6 = 104,
|
|
Numpad7 = 105,
|
|
Numpad8 = 106,
|
|
Numpad9 = 107,
|
|
NumpadMultiply = 108,
|
|
NumpadAdd = 109,
|
|
NUMPAD_SEPARATOR = 110,
|
|
NumpadSubtract = 111,
|
|
NumpadDecimal = 112,
|
|
NumpadDivide = 113,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Cover all key codes when IME is processing input.
|
|
*/
|
|
KEY_IN_COMPOSITION = 114,
|
|
ABNT_C1 = 115,
|
|
ABNT_C2 = 116,
|
|
AudioVolumeMute = 117,
|
|
AudioVolumeUp = 118,
|
|
AudioVolumeDown = 119,
|
|
BrowserSearch = 120,
|
|
BrowserHome = 121,
|
|
BrowserBack = 122,
|
|
BrowserForward = 123,
|
|
MediaTrackNext = 124,
|
|
MediaTrackPrevious = 125,
|
|
MediaStop = 126,
|
|
MediaPlayPause = 127,
|
|
LaunchMediaPlayer = 128,
|
|
LaunchMail = 129,
|
|
LaunchApp2 = 130,
|
|
/**
|
|
* VK_CLEAR, 0x0C, CLEAR key
|
|
*/
|
|
Clear = 131,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Placed last to cover the length of the enum.
|
|
* Please do not depend on this value!
|
|
*/
|
|
MAX_VALUE = 132
|
|
}
|
|
export class KeyMod {
|
|
static readonly CtrlCmd: number;
|
|
static readonly Shift: number;
|
|
static readonly Alt: number;
|
|
static readonly WinCtrl: number;
|
|
static chord(firstPart: number, secondPart: number): number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMarkdownString {
|
|
readonly value: string;
|
|
readonly isTrusted?: boolean | MarkdownStringTrustedOptions;
|
|
readonly supportThemeIcons?: boolean;
|
|
readonly supportHtml?: boolean;
|
|
readonly baseUri?: UriComponents;
|
|
uris?: {
|
|
[href: string]: UriComponents;
|
|
};
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface MarkdownStringTrustedOptions {
|
|
readonly enabledCommands: readonly string[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IKeyboardEvent {
|
|
readonly _standardKeyboardEventBrand: true;
|
|
readonly browserEvent: KeyboardEvent;
|
|
readonly target: HTMLElement;
|
|
readonly ctrlKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly shiftKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly altKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly metaKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly altGraphKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly keyCode: KeyCode;
|
|
readonly code: string;
|
|
equals(keybinding: number): boolean;
|
|
preventDefault(): void;
|
|
stopPropagation(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IMouseEvent {
|
|
readonly browserEvent: MouseEvent;
|
|
readonly leftButton: boolean;
|
|
readonly middleButton: boolean;
|
|
readonly rightButton: boolean;
|
|
readonly buttons: number;
|
|
readonly target: HTMLElement;
|
|
readonly detail: number;
|
|
readonly posx: number;
|
|
readonly posy: number;
|
|
readonly ctrlKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly shiftKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly altKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly metaKey: boolean;
|
|
readonly timestamp: number;
|
|
preventDefault(): void;
|
|
stopPropagation(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IScrollEvent {
|
|
readonly scrollTop: number;
|
|
readonly scrollLeft: number;
|
|
readonly scrollWidth: number;
|
|
readonly scrollHeight: number;
|
|
readonly scrollTopChanged: boolean;
|
|
readonly scrollLeftChanged: boolean;
|
|
readonly scrollWidthChanged: boolean;
|
|
readonly scrollHeightChanged: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* A position in the editor. This interface is suitable for serialization.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IPosition {
|
|
/**
|
|
* line number (starts at 1)
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly lineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* column (the first character in a line is between column 1 and column 2)
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly column: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A position in the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export class Position {
|
|
/**
|
|
* line number (starts at 1)
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly lineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* column (the first character in a line is between column 1 and column 2)
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly column: number;
|
|
constructor(lineNumber: number, column: number);
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new position from this position.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param newLineNumber new line number
|
|
* @param newColumn new column
|
|
*/
|
|
with(newLineNumber?: number, newColumn?: number): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Derive a new position from this position.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param deltaLineNumber line number delta
|
|
* @param deltaColumn column delta
|
|
*/
|
|
delta(deltaLineNumber?: number, deltaColumn?: number): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if this position equals other position
|
|
*/
|
|
equals(other: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if position `a` equals position `b`
|
|
*/
|
|
static equals(a: IPosition | null, b: IPosition | null): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if this position is before other position.
|
|
* If the two positions are equal, the result will be false.
|
|
*/
|
|
isBefore(other: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if position `a` is before position `b`.
|
|
* If the two positions are equal, the result will be false.
|
|
*/
|
|
static isBefore(a: IPosition, b: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if this position is before other position.
|
|
* If the two positions are equal, the result will be true.
|
|
*/
|
|
isBeforeOrEqual(other: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if position `a` is before position `b`.
|
|
* If the two positions are equal, the result will be true.
|
|
*/
|
|
static isBeforeOrEqual(a: IPosition, b: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A function that compares positions, useful for sorting
|
|
*/
|
|
static compare(a: IPosition, b: IPosition): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Clone this position.
|
|
*/
|
|
clone(): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Convert to a human-readable representation.
|
|
*/
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a `Position` from an `IPosition`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static lift(pos: IPosition): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `obj` is an `IPosition`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static isIPosition(obj: any): obj is IPosition;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A range in the editor. This interface is suitable for serialization.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IRange {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Line number on which the range starts (starts at 1).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly startLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Column on which the range starts in line `startLineNumber` (starts at 1).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly startColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Line number on which the range ends.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly endLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Column on which the range ends in line `endLineNumber`.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly endColumn: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A range in the editor. (startLineNumber,startColumn) is <= (endLineNumber,endColumn)
|
|
*/
|
|
export class Range {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Line number on which the range starts (starts at 1).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly startLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Column on which the range starts in line `startLineNumber` (starts at 1).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly startColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Line number on which the range ends.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly endLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Column on which the range ends in line `endLineNumber`.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly endColumn: number;
|
|
constructor(startLineNumber: number, startColumn: number, endLineNumber: number, endColumn: number);
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if this range is empty.
|
|
*/
|
|
isEmpty(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `range` is empty.
|
|
*/
|
|
static isEmpty(range: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if position is in this range. If the position is at the edges, will return true.
|
|
*/
|
|
containsPosition(position: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `position` is in `range`. If the position is at the edges, will return true.
|
|
*/
|
|
static containsPosition(range: IRange, position: IPosition): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if range is in this range. If the range is equal to this range, will return true.
|
|
*/
|
|
containsRange(range: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `otherRange` is in `range`. If the ranges are equal, will return true.
|
|
*/
|
|
static containsRange(range: IRange, otherRange: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `range` is strictly in this range. `range` must start after and end before this range for the result to be true.
|
|
*/
|
|
strictContainsRange(range: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `otherRange` is strictly in `range` (must start after, and end before). If the ranges are equal, will return false.
|
|
*/
|
|
static strictContainsRange(range: IRange, otherRange: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A reunion of the two ranges.
|
|
* The smallest position will be used as the start point, and the largest one as the end point.
|
|
*/
|
|
plusRange(range: IRange): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A reunion of the two ranges.
|
|
* The smallest position will be used as the start point, and the largest one as the end point.
|
|
*/
|
|
static plusRange(a: IRange, b: IRange): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A intersection of the two ranges.
|
|
*/
|
|
intersectRanges(range: IRange): Range | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A intersection of the two ranges.
|
|
*/
|
|
static intersectRanges(a: IRange, b: IRange): Range | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if this range equals other.
|
|
*/
|
|
equalsRange(other: IRange | null | undefined): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if range `a` equals `b`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static equalsRange(a: IRange | null | undefined, b: IRange | null | undefined): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Return the end position (which will be after or equal to the start position)
|
|
*/
|
|
getEndPosition(): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Return the end position (which will be after or equal to the start position)
|
|
*/
|
|
static getEndPosition(range: IRange): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Return the start position (which will be before or equal to the end position)
|
|
*/
|
|
getStartPosition(): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Return the start position (which will be before or equal to the end position)
|
|
*/
|
|
static getStartPosition(range: IRange): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Transform to a user presentable string representation.
|
|
*/
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new range using this range's start position, and using endLineNumber and endColumn as the end position.
|
|
*/
|
|
setEndPosition(endLineNumber: number, endColumn: number): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new range using this range's end position, and using startLineNumber and startColumn as the start position.
|
|
*/
|
|
setStartPosition(startLineNumber: number, startColumn: number): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new empty range using this range's start position.
|
|
*/
|
|
collapseToStart(): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new empty range using this range's start position.
|
|
*/
|
|
static collapseToStart(range: IRange): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new empty range using this range's end position.
|
|
*/
|
|
collapseToEnd(): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new empty range using this range's end position.
|
|
*/
|
|
static collapseToEnd(range: IRange): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Moves the range by the given amount of lines.
|
|
*/
|
|
delta(lineCount: number): Range;
|
|
static fromPositions(start: IPosition, end?: IPosition): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a `Range` from an `IRange`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static lift(range: undefined | null): null;
|
|
static lift(range: IRange): Range;
|
|
static lift(range: IRange | undefined | null): Range | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `obj` is an `IRange`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static isIRange(obj: any): obj is IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if the two ranges are touching in any way.
|
|
*/
|
|
static areIntersectingOrTouching(a: IRange, b: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if the two ranges are intersecting. If the ranges are touching it returns true.
|
|
*/
|
|
static areIntersecting(a: IRange, b: IRange): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A function that compares ranges, useful for sorting ranges
|
|
* It will first compare ranges on the startPosition and then on the endPosition
|
|
*/
|
|
static compareRangesUsingStarts(a: IRange | null | undefined, b: IRange | null | undefined): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A function that compares ranges, useful for sorting ranges
|
|
* It will first compare ranges on the endPosition and then on the startPosition
|
|
*/
|
|
static compareRangesUsingEnds(a: IRange, b: IRange): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if the range spans multiple lines.
|
|
*/
|
|
static spansMultipleLines(range: IRange): boolean;
|
|
toJSON(): IRange;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A selection in the editor.
|
|
* The selection is a range that has an orientation.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ISelection {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line number on which the selection has started.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionStartLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column on `selectionStartLineNumber` where the selection has started.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionStartColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line number on which the selection has ended.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly positionLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column on `positionLineNumber` where the selection has ended.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly positionColumn: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A selection in the editor.
|
|
* The selection is a range that has an orientation.
|
|
*/
|
|
export class Selection extends Range {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line number on which the selection has started.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionStartLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column on `selectionStartLineNumber` where the selection has started.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionStartColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line number on which the selection has ended.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly positionLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column on `positionLineNumber` where the selection has ended.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly positionColumn: number;
|
|
constructor(selectionStartLineNumber: number, selectionStartColumn: number, positionLineNumber: number, positionColumn: number);
|
|
/**
|
|
* Transform to a human-readable representation.
|
|
*/
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if equals other selection.
|
|
*/
|
|
equalsSelection(other: ISelection): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if the two selections are equal.
|
|
*/
|
|
static selectionsEqual(a: ISelection, b: ISelection): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get directions (LTR or RTL).
|
|
*/
|
|
getDirection(): SelectionDirection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new selection with a different `positionLineNumber` and `positionColumn`.
|
|
*/
|
|
setEndPosition(endLineNumber: number, endColumn: number): Selection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the position at `positionLineNumber` and `positionColumn`.
|
|
*/
|
|
getPosition(): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the position at the start of the selection.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSelectionStart(): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new selection with a different `selectionStartLineNumber` and `selectionStartColumn`.
|
|
*/
|
|
setStartPosition(startLineNumber: number, startColumn: number): Selection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a `Selection` from one or two positions
|
|
*/
|
|
static fromPositions(start: IPosition, end?: IPosition): Selection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Creates a `Selection` from a range, given a direction.
|
|
*/
|
|
static fromRange(range: Range, direction: SelectionDirection): Selection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a `Selection` from an `ISelection`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static liftSelection(sel: ISelection): Selection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* `a` equals `b`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static selectionsArrEqual(a: ISelection[], b: ISelection[]): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Test if `obj` is an `ISelection`.
|
|
*/
|
|
static isISelection(obj: any): obj is ISelection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create with a direction.
|
|
*/
|
|
static createWithDirection(startLineNumber: number, startColumn: number, endLineNumber: number, endColumn: number, direction: SelectionDirection): Selection;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The direction of a selection.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum SelectionDirection {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The selection starts above where it ends.
|
|
*/
|
|
LTR = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* The selection starts below where it ends.
|
|
*/
|
|
RTL = 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class Token {
|
|
readonly offset: number;
|
|
readonly type: string;
|
|
readonly language: string;
|
|
_tokenBrand: void;
|
|
constructor(offset: number, type: string, language: string);
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.editor {
|
|
|
|
export interface IDiffNavigator {
|
|
canNavigate(): boolean;
|
|
next(): void;
|
|
previous(): void;
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new editor under `domElement`.
|
|
* `domElement` should be empty (not contain other dom nodes).
|
|
* The editor will read the size of `domElement`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function create(domElement: HTMLElement, options?: IStandaloneEditorConstructionOptions, override?: IEditorOverrideServices): IStandaloneCodeEditor;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emitted when an editor is created.
|
|
* Creating a diff editor might cause this listener to be invoked with the two editors.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onDidCreateEditor(listener: (codeEditor: ICodeEditor) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emitted when an diff editor is created.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onDidCreateDiffEditor(listener: (diffEditor: IDiffEditor) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all the created editors.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function getEditors(): readonly ICodeEditor[];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all the created diff editors.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function getDiffEditors(): readonly IDiffEditor[];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new diff editor under `domElement`.
|
|
* `domElement` should be empty (not contain other dom nodes).
|
|
* The editor will read the size of `domElement`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function createDiffEditor(domElement: HTMLElement, options?: IStandaloneDiffEditorConstructionOptions, override?: IEditorOverrideServices): IStandaloneDiffEditor;
|
|
|
|
export interface IDiffNavigatorOptions {
|
|
readonly followsCaret?: boolean;
|
|
readonly ignoreCharChanges?: boolean;
|
|
readonly alwaysRevealFirst?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export function createDiffNavigator(diffEditor: IStandaloneDiffEditor, opts?: IDiffNavigatorOptions): IDiffNavigator;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Description of a command contribution
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICommandDescriptor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An unique identifier of the contributed command.
|
|
*/
|
|
id: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Callback that will be executed when the command is triggered.
|
|
*/
|
|
run: ICommandHandler;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add a command.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function addCommand(descriptor: ICommandDescriptor): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add an action to all editors.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function addEditorAction(descriptor: IActionDescriptor): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A keybinding rule.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IKeybindingRule {
|
|
keybinding: number;
|
|
command?: string | null;
|
|
commandArgs?: any;
|
|
when?: string | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add a keybinding rule.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function addKeybindingRule(rule: IKeybindingRule): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add keybinding rules.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function addKeybindingRules(rules: IKeybindingRule[]): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new editor model.
|
|
* You can specify the language that should be set for this model or let the language be inferred from the `uri`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function createModel(value: string, language?: string, uri?: Uri): ITextModel;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the language for a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setModelLanguage(model: ITextModel, mimeTypeOrLanguageId: string): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the markers for a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setModelMarkers(model: ITextModel, owner: string, markers: IMarkerData[]): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove all markers of an owner.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function removeAllMarkers(owner: string): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get markers for owner and/or resource
|
|
*
|
|
* @returns list of markers
|
|
*/
|
|
export function getModelMarkers(filter: {
|
|
owner?: string;
|
|
resource?: Uri;
|
|
take?: number;
|
|
}): IMarker[];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emitted when markers change for a model.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onDidChangeMarkers(listener: (e: readonly Uri[]) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the model that has `uri` if it exists.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function getModel(uri: Uri): ITextModel | null;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all the created models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function getModels(): ITextModel[];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emitted when a model is created.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onDidCreateModel(listener: (model: ITextModel) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emitted right before a model is disposed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onWillDisposeModel(listener: (model: ITextModel) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emitted when a different language is set to a model.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onDidChangeModelLanguage(listener: (e: {
|
|
readonly model: ITextModel;
|
|
readonly oldLanguage: string;
|
|
}) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new web worker that has model syncing capabilities built in.
|
|
* Specify an AMD module to load that will `create` an object that will be proxied.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function createWebWorker<T extends object>(opts: IWebWorkerOptions): MonacoWebWorker<T>;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Colorize the contents of `domNode` using attribute `data-lang`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function colorizeElement(domNode: HTMLElement, options: IColorizerElementOptions): Promise<void>;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Colorize `text` using language `languageId`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function colorize(text: string, languageId: string, options: IColorizerOptions): Promise<string>;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Colorize a line in a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function colorizeModelLine(model: ITextModel, lineNumber: number, tabSize?: number): string;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Tokenize `text` using language `languageId`
|
|
*/
|
|
export function tokenize(text: string, languageId: string): Token[][];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Define a new theme or update an existing theme.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function defineTheme(themeName: string, themeData: IStandaloneThemeData): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Switches to a theme.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setTheme(themeName: string): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Clears all cached font measurements and triggers re-measurement.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function remeasureFonts(): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a command.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerCommand(id: string, handler: (accessor: any, ...args: any[]) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
export interface ILinkOpener {
|
|
open(resource: Uri): boolean | Promise<boolean>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Registers a handler that is called when a link is opened in any editor. The handler callback should return `true` if the link was handled and `false` otherwise.
|
|
* The handler that was registered last will be called first when a link is opened.
|
|
*
|
|
* Returns a disposable that can unregister the opener again.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerLinkOpener(opener: ILinkOpener): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Represents an object that can handle editor open operations (e.g. when "go to definition" is called
|
|
* with a resource other than the current model).
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICodeEditorOpener {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Callback that is invoked when a resource other than the current model should be opened (e.g. when "go to definition" is called).
|
|
* The callback should return `true` if the request was handled and `false` otherwise.
|
|
* @param source The code editor instance that initiated the request.
|
|
* @param resource The Uri of the resource that should be opened.
|
|
* @param selectionOrPosition An optional position or selection inside the model corresponding to `resource` that can be used to set the cursor.
|
|
*/
|
|
openCodeEditor(source: ICodeEditor, resource: Uri, selectionOrPosition?: IRange | IPosition): boolean | Promise<boolean>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Registers a handler that is called when a resource other than the current model should be opened in the editor (e.g. "go to definition").
|
|
* The handler callback should return `true` if the request was handled and `false` otherwise.
|
|
*
|
|
* Returns a disposable that can unregister the opener again.
|
|
*
|
|
* If no handler is registered the default behavior is to do nothing for models other than the currently attached one.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerEditorOpener(opener: ICodeEditorOpener): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
export type BuiltinTheme = 'vs' | 'vs-dark' | 'hc-black' | 'hc-light';
|
|
|
|
export interface IStandaloneThemeData {
|
|
base: BuiltinTheme;
|
|
inherit: boolean;
|
|
rules: ITokenThemeRule[];
|
|
encodedTokensColors?: string[];
|
|
colors: IColors;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type IColors = {
|
|
[colorId: string]: string;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
export interface ITokenThemeRule {
|
|
token: string;
|
|
foreground?: string;
|
|
background?: string;
|
|
fontStyle?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A web worker that can provide a proxy to an arbitrary file.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface MonacoWebWorker<T> {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Terminate the web worker, thus invalidating the returned proxy.
|
|
*/
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a proxy to the arbitrary loaded code.
|
|
*/
|
|
getProxy(): Promise<T>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Synchronize (send) the models at `resources` to the web worker,
|
|
* making them available in the monaco.worker.getMirrorModels().
|
|
*/
|
|
withSyncedResources(resources: Uri[]): Promise<T>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IWebWorkerOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The AMD moduleId to load.
|
|
* It should export a function `create` that should return the exported proxy.
|
|
*/
|
|
moduleId: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The data to send over when calling create on the module.
|
|
*/
|
|
createData?: any;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A label to be used to identify the web worker for debugging purposes.
|
|
*/
|
|
label?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An object that can be used by the web worker to make calls back to the main thread.
|
|
*/
|
|
host?: any;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Keep idle models.
|
|
* Defaults to false, which means that idle models will stop syncing after a while.
|
|
*/
|
|
keepIdleModels?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Description of an action contribution
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IActionDescriptor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An unique identifier of the contributed action.
|
|
*/
|
|
id: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A label of the action that will be presented to the user.
|
|
*/
|
|
label: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Precondition rule.
|
|
*/
|
|
precondition?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An array of keybindings for the action.
|
|
*/
|
|
keybindings?: number[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The keybinding rule (condition on top of precondition).
|
|
*/
|
|
keybindingContext?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control if the action should show up in the context menu and where.
|
|
* The context menu of the editor has these default:
|
|
* navigation - The navigation group comes first in all cases.
|
|
* 1_modification - This group comes next and contains commands that modify your code.
|
|
* 9_cutcopypaste - The last default group with the basic editing commands.
|
|
* You can also create your own group.
|
|
* Defaults to null (don't show in context menu).
|
|
*/
|
|
contextMenuGroupId?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the order in the context menu group.
|
|
*/
|
|
contextMenuOrder?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Method that will be executed when the action is triggered.
|
|
* @param editor The editor instance is passed in as a convenience
|
|
*/
|
|
run(editor: ICodeEditor, ...args: any[]): void | Promise<void>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options which apply for all editors.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IGlobalEditorOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The number of spaces a tab is equal to.
|
|
* This setting is overridden based on the file contents when `detectIndentation` is on.
|
|
* Defaults to 4.
|
|
*/
|
|
tabSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Insert spaces when pressing `Tab`.
|
|
* This setting is overridden based on the file contents when `detectIndentation` is on.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
insertSpaces?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether `tabSize` and `insertSpaces` will be automatically detected when a file is opened based on the file contents.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
detectIndentation?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove trailing auto inserted whitespace.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
trimAutoWhitespace?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Special handling for large files to disable certain memory intensive features.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
largeFileOptimizations?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether completions should be computed based on words in the document.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordBasedSuggestions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether word based completions should be included from opened documents of the same language or any language.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordBasedSuggestionsOnlySameLanguage?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the semanticHighlighting is shown for the languages that support it.
|
|
* true: semanticHighlighting is enabled for all themes
|
|
* false: semanticHighlighting is disabled for all themes
|
|
* 'configuredByTheme': semanticHighlighting is controlled by the current color theme's semanticHighlighting setting.
|
|
* Defaults to 'byTheme'.
|
|
*/
|
|
'semanticHighlighting.enabled'?: true | false | 'configuredByTheme';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Keep peek editors open even when double-clicking their content or when hitting `Escape`.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
stablePeek?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Lines above this length will not be tokenized for performance reasons.
|
|
* Defaults to 20000.
|
|
*/
|
|
maxTokenizationLineLength?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Theme to be used for rendering.
|
|
* The current out-of-the-box available themes are: 'vs' (default), 'vs-dark', 'hc-black', 'hc-light'.
|
|
* You can create custom themes via `monaco.editor.defineTheme`.
|
|
* To switch a theme, use `monaco.editor.setTheme`.
|
|
* **NOTE**: The theme might be overwritten if the OS is in high contrast mode, unless `autoDetectHighContrast` is set to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
theme?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If enabled, will automatically change to high contrast theme if the OS is using a high contrast theme.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoDetectHighContrast?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The options to create an editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IStandaloneEditorConstructionOptions extends IEditorConstructionOptions, IGlobalEditorOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial model associated with this code editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
model?: ITextModel | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial value of the auto created model in the editor.
|
|
* To not automatically create a model, use `model: null`.
|
|
*/
|
|
value?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial language of the auto created model in the editor.
|
|
* To not automatically create a model, use `model: null`.
|
|
*/
|
|
language?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Initial theme to be used for rendering.
|
|
* The current out-of-the-box available themes are: 'vs' (default), 'vs-dark', 'hc-black', 'hc-light.
|
|
* You can create custom themes via `monaco.editor.defineTheme`.
|
|
* To switch a theme, use `monaco.editor.setTheme`.
|
|
* **NOTE**: The theme might be overwritten if the OS is in high contrast mode, unless `autoDetectHighContrast` is set to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
theme?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If enabled, will automatically change to high contrast theme if the OS is using a high contrast theme.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoDetectHighContrast?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An URL to open when Ctrl+H (Windows and Linux) or Cmd+H (OSX) is pressed in
|
|
* the accessibility help dialog in the editor.
|
|
*
|
|
* Defaults to "https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=852450"
|
|
*/
|
|
accessibilityHelpUrl?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Container element to use for ARIA messages.
|
|
* Defaults to document.body.
|
|
*/
|
|
ariaContainerElement?: HTMLElement;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The options to create a diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IStandaloneDiffEditorConstructionOptions extends IDiffEditorConstructionOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Initial theme to be used for rendering.
|
|
* The current out-of-the-box available themes are: 'vs' (default), 'vs-dark', 'hc-black', 'hc-light.
|
|
* You can create custom themes via `monaco.editor.defineTheme`.
|
|
* To switch a theme, use `monaco.editor.setTheme`.
|
|
* **NOTE**: The theme might be overwritten if the OS is in high contrast mode, unless `autoDetectHighContrast` is set to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
theme?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If enabled, will automatically change to high contrast theme if the OS is using a high contrast theme.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoDetectHighContrast?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IStandaloneCodeEditor extends ICodeEditor {
|
|
updateOptions(newOptions: IEditorOptions & IGlobalEditorOptions): void;
|
|
addCommand(keybinding: number, handler: ICommandHandler, context?: string): string | null;
|
|
createContextKey<T extends ContextKeyValue = ContextKeyValue>(key: string, defaultValue: T): IContextKey<T>;
|
|
addAction(descriptor: IActionDescriptor): IDisposable;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IStandaloneDiffEditor extends IDiffEditor {
|
|
addCommand(keybinding: number, handler: ICommandHandler, context?: string): string | null;
|
|
createContextKey<T extends ContextKeyValue = ContextKeyValue>(key: string, defaultValue: T): IContextKey<T>;
|
|
addAction(descriptor: IActionDescriptor): IDisposable;
|
|
getOriginalEditor(): IStandaloneCodeEditor;
|
|
getModifiedEditor(): IStandaloneCodeEditor;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface ICommandHandler {
|
|
(...args: any[]): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IContextKey<T extends ContextKeyValue = ContextKeyValue> {
|
|
set(value: T): void;
|
|
reset(): void;
|
|
get(): T | undefined;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type ContextKeyValue = null | undefined | boolean | number | string | Array<null | undefined | boolean | number | string> | Record<string, null | undefined | boolean | number | string>;
|
|
|
|
export interface IEditorOverrideServices {
|
|
[index: string]: any;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMarker {
|
|
owner: string;
|
|
resource: Uri;
|
|
severity: MarkerSeverity;
|
|
code?: string | {
|
|
value: string;
|
|
target: Uri;
|
|
};
|
|
message: string;
|
|
source?: string;
|
|
startLineNumber: number;
|
|
startColumn: number;
|
|
endLineNumber: number;
|
|
endColumn: number;
|
|
modelVersionId?: number;
|
|
relatedInformation?: IRelatedInformation[];
|
|
tags?: MarkerTag[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A structure defining a problem/warning/etc.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IMarkerData {
|
|
code?: string | {
|
|
value: string;
|
|
target: Uri;
|
|
};
|
|
severity: MarkerSeverity;
|
|
message: string;
|
|
source?: string;
|
|
startLineNumber: number;
|
|
startColumn: number;
|
|
endLineNumber: number;
|
|
endColumn: number;
|
|
modelVersionId?: number;
|
|
relatedInformation?: IRelatedInformation[];
|
|
tags?: MarkerTag[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
*
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IRelatedInformation {
|
|
resource: Uri;
|
|
message: string;
|
|
startLineNumber: number;
|
|
startColumn: number;
|
|
endLineNumber: number;
|
|
endColumn: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IColorizerOptions {
|
|
tabSize?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IColorizerElementOptions extends IColorizerOptions {
|
|
theme?: string;
|
|
mimeType?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum ScrollbarVisibility {
|
|
Auto = 1,
|
|
Hidden = 2,
|
|
Visible = 3
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface ThemeColor {
|
|
id: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A single edit operation, that acts as a simple replace.
|
|
* i.e. Replace text at `range` with `text` in model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ISingleEditOperation {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range to replace. This can be empty to emulate a simple insert.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The text to replace with. This can be null to emulate a simple delete.
|
|
*/
|
|
text: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* This indicates that this operation has "insert" semantics.
|
|
* i.e. forceMoveMarkers = true => if `range` is collapsed, all markers at the position will be moved.
|
|
*/
|
|
forceMoveMarkers?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Word inside a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IWordAtPosition {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The word.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly word: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column where the word starts.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly startColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column where the word ends.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly endColumn: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Vertical Lane in the overview ruler of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum OverviewRulerLane {
|
|
Left = 1,
|
|
Center = 2,
|
|
Right = 4,
|
|
Full = 7
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Vertical Lane in the glyph margin of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum GlyphMarginLane {
|
|
Left = 1,
|
|
Right = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Position in the minimap to render the decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum MinimapPosition {
|
|
Inline = 1,
|
|
Gutter = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IDecorationOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* CSS color to render.
|
|
* e.g.: rgba(100, 100, 100, 0.5) or a color from the color registry
|
|
*/
|
|
color: string | ThemeColor | undefined;
|
|
/**
|
|
* CSS color to render.
|
|
* e.g.: rgba(100, 100, 100, 0.5) or a color from the color registry
|
|
*/
|
|
darkColor?: string | ThemeColor;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IModelDecorationGlyphMarginOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The position in the glyph margin.
|
|
*/
|
|
position: GlyphMarginLane;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for rendering a model decoration in the overview ruler.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelDecorationOverviewRulerOptions extends IDecorationOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The position in the overview ruler.
|
|
*/
|
|
position: OverviewRulerLane;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for rendering a model decoration in the minimap.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelDecorationMinimapOptions extends IDecorationOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The position in the minimap.
|
|
*/
|
|
position: MinimapPosition;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for a model decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelDecorationOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Customize the growing behavior of the decoration when typing at the edges of the decoration.
|
|
* Defaults to TrackedRangeStickiness.AlwaysGrowsWhenTypingAtEdges
|
|
*/
|
|
stickiness?: TrackedRangeStickiness;
|
|
/**
|
|
* CSS class name describing the decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
className?: string | null;
|
|
blockClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Indicates if this block should be rendered after the last line.
|
|
* In this case, the range must be empty and set to the last line.
|
|
*/
|
|
blockIsAfterEnd?: boolean | null;
|
|
blockDoesNotCollapse?: boolean | null;
|
|
blockPadding?: [top: number, right: number, bottom: number, left: number] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Message to be rendered when hovering over the glyph margin decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
glyphMarginHoverMessage?: IMarkdownString | IMarkdownString[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Array of MarkdownString to render as the decoration message.
|
|
*/
|
|
hoverMessage?: IMarkdownString | IMarkdownString[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the decoration expand to encompass a whole line.
|
|
*/
|
|
isWholeLine?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Always render the decoration (even when the range it encompasses is collapsed).
|
|
*/
|
|
showIfCollapsed?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Specifies the stack order of a decoration.
|
|
* A decoration with greater stack order is always in front of a decoration with
|
|
* a lower stack order when the decorations are on the same line.
|
|
*/
|
|
zIndex?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, render this decoration in the overview ruler.
|
|
*/
|
|
overviewRuler?: IModelDecorationOverviewRulerOptions | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, render this decoration in the minimap.
|
|
*/
|
|
minimap?: IModelDecorationMinimapOptions | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered in the glyph margin with this CSS class name.
|
|
*/
|
|
glyphMarginClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set and the decoration has {@link glyphMarginClassName} set, render this decoration
|
|
* with the specified {@link IModelDecorationGlyphMarginOptions} in the glyph margin.
|
|
*/
|
|
glyphMargin?: IModelDecorationGlyphMarginOptions | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered in the lines decorations with this CSS class name.
|
|
*/
|
|
linesDecorationsClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered in the lines decorations with this CSS class name, but only for the first line in case of line wrapping.
|
|
*/
|
|
firstLineDecorationClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered in the margin (covering its full width) with this CSS class name.
|
|
*/
|
|
marginClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered inline with the text with this CSS class name.
|
|
* Please use this only for CSS rules that must impact the text. For example, use `className`
|
|
* to have a background color decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
inlineClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If there is an `inlineClassName` which affects letter spacing.
|
|
*/
|
|
inlineClassNameAffectsLetterSpacing?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered before the text with this CSS class name.
|
|
*/
|
|
beforeContentClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered after the text with this CSS class name.
|
|
*/
|
|
afterContentClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, text will be injected in the view after the range.
|
|
*/
|
|
after?: InjectedTextOptions | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, text will be injected in the view before the range.
|
|
*/
|
|
before?: InjectedTextOptions | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures text that is injected into the view without changing the underlying document.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface InjectedTextOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Sets the text to inject. Must be a single line.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly content: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the decoration will be rendered inline with the text with this CSS class name.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly inlineClassName?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If there is an `inlineClassName` which affects letter spacing.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly inlineClassNameAffectsLetterSpacing?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* This field allows to attach data to this injected text.
|
|
* The data can be read when injected texts at a given position are queried.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly attachedData?: unknown;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures cursor stops around injected text.
|
|
* Defaults to {@link InjectedTextCursorStops.Both}.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly cursorStops?: InjectedTextCursorStops | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum InjectedTextCursorStops {
|
|
Both = 0,
|
|
Right = 1,
|
|
Left = 2,
|
|
None = 3
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* New model decorations.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelDeltaDecoration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Range that this decoration covers.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options associated with this decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
options: IModelDecorationOptions;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A decoration in the model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelDecoration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Identifier for a decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly id: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Identifier for a decoration's owner.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly ownerId: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Range that this decoration covers.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options associated with this decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly options: IModelDecorationOptions;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* End of line character preference.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum EndOfLinePreference {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use the end of line character identified in the text buffer.
|
|
*/
|
|
TextDefined = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use line feed (\n) as the end of line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
LF = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use carriage return and line feed (\r\n) as the end of line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
CRLF = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The default end of line to use when instantiating models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum DefaultEndOfLine {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use line feed (\n) as the end of line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
LF = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use carriage return and line feed (\r\n) as the end of line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
CRLF = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* End of line character preference.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum EndOfLineSequence {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use line feed (\n) as the end of line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
LF = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use carriage return and line feed (\r\n) as the end of line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
CRLF = 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A single edit operation, that has an identifier.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IIdentifiedSingleEditOperation extends ISingleEditOperation {
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IValidEditOperation {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range to replace. This can be empty to emulate a simple insert.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The text to replace with. This can be empty to emulate a simple delete.
|
|
*/
|
|
text: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A callback that can compute the cursor state after applying a series of edit operations.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICursorStateComputer {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A callback that can compute the resulting cursors state after some edit operations have been executed.
|
|
*/
|
|
(inverseEditOperations: IValidEditOperation[]): Selection[] | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class TextModelResolvedOptions {
|
|
_textModelResolvedOptionsBrand: void;
|
|
readonly tabSize: number;
|
|
readonly indentSize: number;
|
|
readonly insertSpaces: boolean;
|
|
readonly defaultEOL: DefaultEndOfLine;
|
|
readonly trimAutoWhitespace: boolean;
|
|
readonly bracketPairColorizationOptions: BracketPairColorizationOptions;
|
|
get originalIndentSize(): number | 'tabSize';
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface BracketPairColorizationOptions {
|
|
enabled: boolean;
|
|
independentColorPoolPerBracketType: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface ITextModelUpdateOptions {
|
|
tabSize?: number;
|
|
indentSize?: number | 'tabSize';
|
|
insertSpaces?: boolean;
|
|
trimAutoWhitespace?: boolean;
|
|
bracketColorizationOptions?: BracketPairColorizationOptions;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class FindMatch {
|
|
_findMatchBrand: void;
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
readonly matches: string[] | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes the behavior of decorations when typing/editing near their edges.
|
|
* Note: Please do not edit the values, as they very carefully match `DecorationRangeBehavior`
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum TrackedRangeStickiness {
|
|
AlwaysGrowsWhenTypingAtEdges = 0,
|
|
NeverGrowsWhenTypingAtEdges = 1,
|
|
GrowsOnlyWhenTypingBefore = 2,
|
|
GrowsOnlyWhenTypingAfter = 3
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Text snapshot that works like an iterator.
|
|
* Will try to return chunks of roughly ~64KB size.
|
|
* Will return null when finished.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ITextSnapshot {
|
|
read(): string | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ITextModel {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets the resource associated with this editor model.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly uri: Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A unique identifier associated with this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly id: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the resolved options for this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
getOptions(): TextModelResolvedOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the current version id of the model.
|
|
* Anytime a change happens to the model (even undo/redo),
|
|
* the version id is incremented.
|
|
*/
|
|
getVersionId(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the alternative version id of the model.
|
|
* This alternative version id is not always incremented,
|
|
* it will return the same values in the case of undo-redo.
|
|
*/
|
|
getAlternativeVersionId(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Replace the entire text buffer value contained in this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
setValue(newValue: string | ITextSnapshot): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the text stored in this model.
|
|
* @param eol The end of line character preference. Defaults to `EndOfLinePreference.TextDefined`.
|
|
* @param preserverBOM Preserve a BOM character if it was detected when the model was constructed.
|
|
* @return The text.
|
|
*/
|
|
getValue(eol?: EndOfLinePreference, preserveBOM?: boolean): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the text stored in this model.
|
|
* @param preserverBOM Preserve a BOM character if it was detected when the model was constructed.
|
|
* @return The text snapshot (it is safe to consume it asynchronously).
|
|
*/
|
|
createSnapshot(preserveBOM?: boolean): ITextSnapshot;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the length of the text stored in this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
getValueLength(eol?: EndOfLinePreference, preserveBOM?: boolean): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the text in a certain range.
|
|
* @param range The range describing what text to get.
|
|
* @param eol The end of line character preference. This will only be used for multiline ranges. Defaults to `EndOfLinePreference.TextDefined`.
|
|
* @return The text.
|
|
*/
|
|
getValueInRange(range: IRange, eol?: EndOfLinePreference): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the length of text in a certain range.
|
|
* @param range The range describing what text length to get.
|
|
* @return The text length.
|
|
*/
|
|
getValueLengthInRange(range: IRange, eol?: EndOfLinePreference): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the character count of text in a certain range.
|
|
* @param range The range describing what text length to get.
|
|
*/
|
|
getCharacterCountInRange(range: IRange, eol?: EndOfLinePreference): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the number of lines in the model.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineCount(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the text for a certain line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineContent(lineNumber: number): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the text length for a certain line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineLength(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the text for all lines.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLinesContent(): string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the end of line sequence predominantly used in the text buffer.
|
|
* @return EOL char sequence (e.g.: '\n' or '\r\n').
|
|
*/
|
|
getEOL(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the end of line sequence predominantly used in the text buffer.
|
|
*/
|
|
getEndOfLineSequence(): EndOfLineSequence;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the minimum legal column for line at `lineNumber`
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineMinColumn(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the maximum legal column for line at `lineNumber`
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineMaxColumn(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the column before the first non whitespace character for line at `lineNumber`.
|
|
* Returns 0 if line is empty or contains only whitespace.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineFirstNonWhitespaceColumn(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the column after the last non whitespace character for line at `lineNumber`.
|
|
* Returns 0 if line is empty or contains only whitespace.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineLastNonWhitespaceColumn(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a valid position.
|
|
*/
|
|
validatePosition(position: IPosition): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Advances the given position by the given offset (negative offsets are also accepted)
|
|
* and returns it as a new valid position.
|
|
*
|
|
* If the offset and position are such that their combination goes beyond the beginning or
|
|
* end of the model, throws an exception.
|
|
*
|
|
* If the offset is such that the new position would be in the middle of a multi-byte
|
|
* line terminator, throws an exception.
|
|
*/
|
|
modifyPosition(position: IPosition, offset: number): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a valid range.
|
|
*/
|
|
validateRange(range: IRange): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Converts the position to a zero-based offset.
|
|
*
|
|
* The position will be [adjusted](#TextDocument.validatePosition).
|
|
*
|
|
* @param position A position.
|
|
* @return A valid zero-based offset.
|
|
*/
|
|
getOffsetAt(position: IPosition): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Converts a zero-based offset to a position.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param offset A zero-based offset.
|
|
* @return A valid [position](#Position).
|
|
*/
|
|
getPositionAt(offset: number): Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a range covering the entire model.
|
|
*/
|
|
getFullModelRange(): Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns if the model was disposed or not.
|
|
*/
|
|
isDisposed(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Search the model.
|
|
* @param searchString The string used to search. If it is a regular expression, set `isRegex` to true.
|
|
* @param searchOnlyEditableRange Limit the searching to only search inside the editable range of the model.
|
|
* @param isRegex Used to indicate that `searchString` is a regular expression.
|
|
* @param matchCase Force the matching to match lower/upper case exactly.
|
|
* @param wordSeparators Force the matching to match entire words only. Pass null otherwise.
|
|
* @param captureMatches The result will contain the captured groups.
|
|
* @param limitResultCount Limit the number of results
|
|
* @return The ranges where the matches are. It is empty if not matches have been found.
|
|
*/
|
|
findMatches(searchString: string, searchOnlyEditableRange: boolean, isRegex: boolean, matchCase: boolean, wordSeparators: string | null, captureMatches: boolean, limitResultCount?: number): FindMatch[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Search the model.
|
|
* @param searchString The string used to search. If it is a regular expression, set `isRegex` to true.
|
|
* @param searchScope Limit the searching to only search inside these ranges.
|
|
* @param isRegex Used to indicate that `searchString` is a regular expression.
|
|
* @param matchCase Force the matching to match lower/upper case exactly.
|
|
* @param wordSeparators Force the matching to match entire words only. Pass null otherwise.
|
|
* @param captureMatches The result will contain the captured groups.
|
|
* @param limitResultCount Limit the number of results
|
|
* @return The ranges where the matches are. It is empty if no matches have been found.
|
|
*/
|
|
findMatches(searchString: string, searchScope: IRange | IRange[], isRegex: boolean, matchCase: boolean, wordSeparators: string | null, captureMatches: boolean, limitResultCount?: number): FindMatch[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Search the model for the next match. Loops to the beginning of the model if needed.
|
|
* @param searchString The string used to search. If it is a regular expression, set `isRegex` to true.
|
|
* @param searchStart Start the searching at the specified position.
|
|
* @param isRegex Used to indicate that `searchString` is a regular expression.
|
|
* @param matchCase Force the matching to match lower/upper case exactly.
|
|
* @param wordSeparators Force the matching to match entire words only. Pass null otherwise.
|
|
* @param captureMatches The result will contain the captured groups.
|
|
* @return The range where the next match is. It is null if no next match has been found.
|
|
*/
|
|
findNextMatch(searchString: string, searchStart: IPosition, isRegex: boolean, matchCase: boolean, wordSeparators: string | null, captureMatches: boolean): FindMatch | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Search the model for the previous match. Loops to the end of the model if needed.
|
|
* @param searchString The string used to search. If it is a regular expression, set `isRegex` to true.
|
|
* @param searchStart Start the searching at the specified position.
|
|
* @param isRegex Used to indicate that `searchString` is a regular expression.
|
|
* @param matchCase Force the matching to match lower/upper case exactly.
|
|
* @param wordSeparators Force the matching to match entire words only. Pass null otherwise.
|
|
* @param captureMatches The result will contain the captured groups.
|
|
* @return The range where the previous match is. It is null if no previous match has been found.
|
|
*/
|
|
findPreviousMatch(searchString: string, searchStart: IPosition, isRegex: boolean, matchCase: boolean, wordSeparators: string | null, captureMatches: boolean): FindMatch | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the language associated with this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLanguageId(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the word under or besides `position`.
|
|
* @param position The position to look for a word.
|
|
* @return The word under or besides `position`. Might be null.
|
|
*/
|
|
getWordAtPosition(position: IPosition): IWordAtPosition | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the word under or besides `position` trimmed to `position`.column
|
|
* @param position The position to look for a word.
|
|
* @return The word under or besides `position`. Will never be null.
|
|
*/
|
|
getWordUntilPosition(position: IPosition): IWordAtPosition;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Perform a minimum amount of operations, in order to transform the decorations
|
|
* identified by `oldDecorations` to the decorations described by `newDecorations`
|
|
* and returns the new identifiers associated with the resulting decorations.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param oldDecorations Array containing previous decorations identifiers.
|
|
* @param newDecorations Array describing what decorations should result after the call.
|
|
* @param ownerId Identifies the editor id in which these decorations should appear. If no `ownerId` is provided, the decorations will appear in all editors that attach this model.
|
|
* @return An array containing the new decorations identifiers.
|
|
*/
|
|
deltaDecorations(oldDecorations: string[], newDecorations: IModelDeltaDecoration[], ownerId?: number): string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the options associated with a decoration.
|
|
* @param id The decoration id.
|
|
* @return The decoration options or null if the decoration was not found.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDecorationOptions(id: string): IModelDecorationOptions | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the range associated with a decoration.
|
|
* @param id The decoration id.
|
|
* @return The decoration range or null if the decoration was not found.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDecorationRange(id: string): Range | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the decorations for the line `lineNumber` as an array.
|
|
* @param lineNumber The line number
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
* @param filterOutValidation If set, it will ignore decorations specific to validation (i.e. warnings, errors).
|
|
* @return An array with the decorations
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineDecorations(lineNumber: number, ownerId?: number, filterOutValidation?: boolean): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the decorations for the lines between `startLineNumber` and `endLineNumber` as an array.
|
|
* @param startLineNumber The start line number
|
|
* @param endLineNumber The end line number
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
* @param filterOutValidation If set, it will ignore decorations specific to validation (i.e. warnings, errors).
|
|
* @return An array with the decorations
|
|
*/
|
|
getLinesDecorations(startLineNumber: number, endLineNumber: number, ownerId?: number, filterOutValidation?: boolean): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the decorations in a range as an array. Only `startLineNumber` and `endLineNumber` from `range` are used for filtering.
|
|
* So for now it returns all the decorations on the same line as `range`.
|
|
* @param range The range to search in
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
* @param filterOutValidation If set, it will ignore decorations specific to validation (i.e. warnings, errors).
|
|
* @param onlyMinimapDecorations If set, it will return only decorations that render in the minimap.
|
|
* @param onlyMarginDecorations If set, it will return only decorations that render in the glyph margin.
|
|
* @return An array with the decorations
|
|
*/
|
|
getDecorationsInRange(range: IRange, ownerId?: number, filterOutValidation?: boolean, onlyMinimapDecorations?: boolean, onlyMarginDecorations?: boolean): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the decorations as an array.
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
* @param filterOutValidation If set, it will ignore decorations specific to validation (i.e. warnings, errors).
|
|
*/
|
|
getAllDecorations(ownerId?: number, filterOutValidation?: boolean): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all decorations that render in the glyph margin as an array.
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
*/
|
|
getAllMarginDecorations(ownerId?: number): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the decorations that should be rendered in the overview ruler as an array.
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
* @param filterOutValidation If set, it will ignore decorations specific to validation (i.e. warnings, errors).
|
|
*/
|
|
getOverviewRulerDecorations(ownerId?: number, filterOutValidation?: boolean): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the decorations that contain injected text.
|
|
* @param ownerId If set, it will ignore decorations belonging to other owners.
|
|
*/
|
|
getInjectedTextDecorations(ownerId?: number): IModelDecoration[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Normalize a string containing whitespace according to indentation rules (converts to spaces or to tabs).
|
|
*/
|
|
normalizeIndentation(str: string): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the options of this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
updateOptions(newOpts: ITextModelUpdateOptions): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Detect the indentation options for this model from its content.
|
|
*/
|
|
detectIndentation(defaultInsertSpaces: boolean, defaultTabSize: number): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Close the current undo-redo element.
|
|
* This offers a way to create an undo/redo stop point.
|
|
*/
|
|
pushStackElement(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Open the current undo-redo element.
|
|
* This offers a way to remove the current undo/redo stop point.
|
|
*/
|
|
popStackElement(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Push edit operations, basically editing the model. This is the preferred way
|
|
* of editing the model. The edit operations will land on the undo stack.
|
|
* @param beforeCursorState The cursor state before the edit operations. This cursor state will be returned when `undo` or `redo` are invoked.
|
|
* @param editOperations The edit operations.
|
|
* @param cursorStateComputer A callback that can compute the resulting cursors state after the edit operations have been executed.
|
|
* @return The cursor state returned by the `cursorStateComputer`.
|
|
*/
|
|
pushEditOperations(beforeCursorState: Selection[] | null, editOperations: IIdentifiedSingleEditOperation[], cursorStateComputer: ICursorStateComputer): Selection[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the end of line sequence. This is the preferred way of
|
|
* changing the eol sequence. This will land on the undo stack.
|
|
*/
|
|
pushEOL(eol: EndOfLineSequence): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Edit the model without adding the edits to the undo stack.
|
|
* This can have dire consequences on the undo stack! See @pushEditOperations for the preferred way.
|
|
* @param operations The edit operations.
|
|
* @return If desired, the inverse edit operations, that, when applied, will bring the model back to the previous state.
|
|
*/
|
|
applyEdits(operations: IIdentifiedSingleEditOperation[]): void;
|
|
applyEdits(operations: IIdentifiedSingleEditOperation[], computeUndoEdits: false): void;
|
|
applyEdits(operations: IIdentifiedSingleEditOperation[], computeUndoEdits: true): IValidEditOperation[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the end of line sequence without recording in the undo stack.
|
|
* This can have dire consequences on the undo stack! See @pushEOL for the preferred way.
|
|
*/
|
|
setEOL(eol: EndOfLineSequence): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the contents of the model have changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
onDidChangeContent(listener: (e: IModelContentChangedEvent) => void): IDisposable;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when decorations of the model have changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeDecorations: IEvent<IModelDecorationsChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the model options have changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeOptions: IEvent<IModelOptionsChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the language associated with the model has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeLanguage: IEvent<IModelLanguageChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the language configuration associated with the model has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeLanguageConfiguration: IEvent<IModelLanguageConfigurationChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the model has been attached to the first editor or detached from the last editor.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeAttached: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted right before disposing the model.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onWillDispose: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Destroy this model.
|
|
*/
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns if this model is attached to an editor or not.
|
|
*/
|
|
isAttachedToEditor(): boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum PositionAffinity {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Prefers the left most position.
|
|
*/
|
|
Left = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Prefers the right most position.
|
|
*/
|
|
Right = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* No preference.
|
|
*/
|
|
None = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* If the given position is on injected text, prefers the position left of it.
|
|
*/
|
|
LeftOfInjectedText = 3,
|
|
/**
|
|
* If the given position is on injected text, prefers the position right of it.
|
|
*/
|
|
RightOfInjectedText = 4
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A change
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IChange {
|
|
readonly originalStartLineNumber: number;
|
|
readonly originalEndLineNumber: number;
|
|
readonly modifiedStartLineNumber: number;
|
|
readonly modifiedEndLineNumber: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A character level change.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICharChange extends IChange {
|
|
readonly originalStartColumn: number;
|
|
readonly originalEndColumn: number;
|
|
readonly modifiedStartColumn: number;
|
|
readonly modifiedEndColumn: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A line change
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ILineChange extends IChange {
|
|
readonly charChanges: ICharChange[] | undefined;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A document diff provider computes the diff between two text models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDocumentDiffProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Computes the diff between the text models `original` and `modified`.
|
|
*/
|
|
computeDiff(original: ITextModel, modified: ITextModel, options: IDocumentDiffProviderOptions): Promise<IDocumentDiff>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Is fired when settings of the diff algorithm change that could alter the result of the diffing computation.
|
|
* Any user of this provider should recompute the diff when this event is fired.
|
|
*/
|
|
onDidChange: IEvent<void>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for the diff computation.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDocumentDiffProviderOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* When set to true, the diff should ignore whitespace changes.i
|
|
*/
|
|
ignoreTrimWhitespace: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A diff computation should throw if it takes longer than this value.
|
|
*/
|
|
maxComputationTimeMs: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Represents a diff between two text models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDocumentDiff {
|
|
/**
|
|
* If true, both text models are identical (byte-wise).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly identical: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If true, the diff computation timed out and the diff might not be accurate.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly quitEarly: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Maps all modified line ranges in the original to the corresponding line ranges in the modified text model.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly changes: LineRangeMapping[];
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* A range of lines (1-based).
|
|
*/
|
|
export class LineRange {
|
|
/**
|
|
* @param lineRanges An array of sorted line ranges.
|
|
*/
|
|
static joinMany(lineRanges: readonly (readonly LineRange[])[]): readonly LineRange[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* @param lineRanges1 Must be sorted.
|
|
* @param lineRanges2 Must be sorted.
|
|
*/
|
|
static join(lineRanges1: readonly LineRange[], lineRanges2: readonly LineRange[]): readonly LineRange[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The start line number.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly startLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The end line number (exclusive).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly endLineNumberExclusive: number;
|
|
constructor(startLineNumber: number, endLineNumberExclusive: number);
|
|
/**
|
|
* Indicates if this line range contains the given line number.
|
|
*/
|
|
contains(lineNumber: number): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Indicates if this line range is empty.
|
|
*/
|
|
get isEmpty(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Moves this line range by the given offset of line numbers.
|
|
*/
|
|
delta(offset: number): LineRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The number of lines this line range spans.
|
|
*/
|
|
get length(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Creates a line range that combines this and the given line range.
|
|
*/
|
|
join(other: LineRange): LineRange;
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The resulting range is empty if the ranges do not intersect, but touch.
|
|
* If the ranges don't even touch, the result is undefined.
|
|
*/
|
|
intersect(other: LineRange): LineRange | undefined;
|
|
overlapOrTouch(other: LineRange): boolean;
|
|
equals(b: LineRange): boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Maps a line range in the original text model to a line range in the modified text model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export class LineRangeMapping {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line range in the original text model.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly originalRange: LineRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line range in the modified text model.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly modifiedRange: LineRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If inner changes have not been computed, this is set to undefined.
|
|
* Otherwise, it represents the character-level diff in this line range.
|
|
* The original range of each range mapping should be contained in the original line range (same for modified), exceptions are new-lines.
|
|
* Must not be an empty array.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly innerChanges: RangeMapping[] | undefined;
|
|
constructor(originalRange: LineRange, modifiedRange: LineRange, innerChanges: RangeMapping[] | undefined);
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
get changedLineCount(): any;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Maps a range in the original text model to a range in the modified text model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export class RangeMapping {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The original range.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly originalRange: Range;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The modified range.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly modifiedRange: Range;
|
|
constructor(originalRange: Range, modifiedRange: Range);
|
|
toString(): string;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IDimension {
|
|
width: number;
|
|
height: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A builder and helper for edit operations for a command.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditOperationBuilder {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add a new edit operation (a replace operation).
|
|
* @param range The range to replace (delete). May be empty to represent a simple insert.
|
|
* @param text The text to replace with. May be null to represent a simple delete.
|
|
*/
|
|
addEditOperation(range: IRange, text: string | null, forceMoveMarkers?: boolean): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add a new edit operation (a replace operation).
|
|
* The inverse edits will be accessible in `ICursorStateComputerData.getInverseEditOperations()`
|
|
* @param range The range to replace (delete). May be empty to represent a simple insert.
|
|
* @param text The text to replace with. May be null to represent a simple delete.
|
|
*/
|
|
addTrackedEditOperation(range: IRange, text: string | null, forceMoveMarkers?: boolean): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Track `selection` when applying edit operations.
|
|
* A best effort will be made to not grow/expand the selection.
|
|
* An empty selection will clamp to a nearby character.
|
|
* @param selection The selection to track.
|
|
* @param trackPreviousOnEmpty If set, and the selection is empty, indicates whether the selection
|
|
* should clamp to the previous or the next character.
|
|
* @return A unique identifier.
|
|
*/
|
|
trackSelection(selection: Selection, trackPreviousOnEmpty?: boolean): string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A helper for computing cursor state after a command.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICursorStateComputerData {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the inverse edit operations of the added edit operations.
|
|
*/
|
|
getInverseEditOperations(): IValidEditOperation[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a previously tracked selection.
|
|
* @param id The unique identifier returned by `trackSelection`.
|
|
* @return The selection.
|
|
*/
|
|
getTrackedSelection(id: string): Selection;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A command that modifies text / cursor state on a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICommand {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the edit operations needed to execute this command.
|
|
* @param model The model the command will execute on.
|
|
* @param builder A helper to collect the needed edit operations and to track selections.
|
|
*/
|
|
getEditOperations(model: ITextModel, builder: IEditOperationBuilder): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Compute the cursor state after the edit operations were applied.
|
|
* @param model The model the command has executed on.
|
|
* @param helper A helper to get inverse edit operations and to get previously tracked selections.
|
|
* @return The cursor state after the command executed.
|
|
*/
|
|
computeCursorState(model: ITextModel, helper: ICursorStateComputerData): Selection;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A model for the diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDiffEditorModel {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Original model.
|
|
*/
|
|
original: ITextModel;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Modified model.
|
|
*/
|
|
modified: ITextModel;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that an editor has had its model reset (i.e. `editor.setModel()`).
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelChangedEvent {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The `uri` of the previous model or null.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly oldModelUrl: Uri | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The `uri` of the new model or null.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly newModelUrl: Uri | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IContentSizeChangedEvent {
|
|
readonly contentWidth: number;
|
|
readonly contentHeight: number;
|
|
readonly contentWidthChanged: boolean;
|
|
readonly contentHeightChanged: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface INewScrollPosition {
|
|
scrollLeft?: number;
|
|
scrollTop?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IEditorAction {
|
|
readonly id: string;
|
|
readonly label: string;
|
|
readonly alias: string;
|
|
isSupported(): boolean;
|
|
run(args?: unknown): Promise<void>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type IEditorModel = ITextModel | IDiffEditorModel;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A (serializable) state of the cursors.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICursorState {
|
|
inSelectionMode: boolean;
|
|
selectionStart: IPosition;
|
|
position: IPosition;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A (serializable) state of the view.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IViewState {
|
|
/** written by previous versions */
|
|
scrollTop?: number;
|
|
/** written by previous versions */
|
|
scrollTopWithoutViewZones?: number;
|
|
scrollLeft: number;
|
|
firstPosition: IPosition;
|
|
firstPositionDeltaTop: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A (serializable) state of the code editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICodeEditorViewState {
|
|
cursorState: ICursorState[];
|
|
viewState: IViewState;
|
|
contributionsState: {
|
|
[id: string]: any;
|
|
};
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* (Serializable) View state for the diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDiffEditorViewState {
|
|
original: ICodeEditorViewState | null;
|
|
modified: ICodeEditorViewState | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An editor view state.
|
|
*/
|
|
export type IEditorViewState = ICodeEditorViewState | IDiffEditorViewState;
|
|
|
|
export enum ScrollType {
|
|
Smooth = 0,
|
|
Immediate = 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the editor has been disposed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
onDidDispose(listener: () => void): IDisposable;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Dispose the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a unique id for this editor instance.
|
|
*/
|
|
getId(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the editor type. Please see `EditorType`.
|
|
* This is to avoid an instanceof check
|
|
*/
|
|
getEditorType(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Update the editor's options after the editor has been created.
|
|
*/
|
|
updateOptions(newOptions: IEditorOptions): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Instructs the editor to remeasure its container. This method should
|
|
* be called when the container of the editor gets resized.
|
|
*
|
|
* If a dimension is passed in, the passed in value will be used.
|
|
*/
|
|
layout(dimension?: IDimension): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Brings browser focus to the editor text
|
|
*/
|
|
focus(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns true if the text inside this editor is focused (i.e. cursor is blinking).
|
|
*/
|
|
hasTextFocus(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns all actions associated with this editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSupportedActions(): IEditorAction[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Saves current view state of the editor in a serializable object.
|
|
*/
|
|
saveViewState(): IEditorViewState | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Restores the view state of the editor from a serializable object generated by `saveViewState`.
|
|
*/
|
|
restoreViewState(state: IEditorViewState | null): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Given a position, returns a column number that takes tab-widths into account.
|
|
*/
|
|
getVisibleColumnFromPosition(position: IPosition): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the primary position of the cursor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getPosition(): Position | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the primary position of the cursor. This will remove any secondary cursors.
|
|
* @param position New primary cursor's position
|
|
* @param source Source of the call that caused the position
|
|
*/
|
|
setPosition(position: IPosition, source?: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal a line.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLine(lineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal a line centered vertically.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLineInCenter(lineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal a line centered vertically only if it lies outside the viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLineInCenterIfOutsideViewport(lineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal a line close to the top of the viewport,
|
|
* optimized for viewing a code definition.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLineNearTop(lineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a position.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealPosition(position: IPosition, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a position centered vertically.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealPositionInCenter(position: IPosition, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a position centered vertically only if it lies outside the viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealPositionInCenterIfOutsideViewport(position: IPosition, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a position close to the top of the viewport,
|
|
* optimized for viewing a code definition.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealPositionNearTop(position: IPosition, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the primary selection of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSelection(): Selection | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns all the selections of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSelections(): Selection[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the primary selection of the editor. This will remove any secondary cursors.
|
|
* @param selection The new selection
|
|
* @param source Source of the call that caused the selection
|
|
*/
|
|
setSelection(selection: IRange, source?: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the primary selection of the editor. This will remove any secondary cursors.
|
|
* @param selection The new selection
|
|
* @param source Source of the call that caused the selection
|
|
*/
|
|
setSelection(selection: Range, source?: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the primary selection of the editor. This will remove any secondary cursors.
|
|
* @param selection The new selection
|
|
* @param source Source of the call that caused the selection
|
|
*/
|
|
setSelection(selection: ISelection, source?: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the primary selection of the editor. This will remove any secondary cursors.
|
|
* @param selection The new selection
|
|
* @param source Source of the call that caused the selection
|
|
*/
|
|
setSelection(selection: Selection, source?: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the selections for all the cursors of the editor.
|
|
* Cursors will be removed or added, as necessary.
|
|
* @param selections The new selection
|
|
* @param source Source of the call that caused the selection
|
|
*/
|
|
setSelections(selections: readonly ISelection[], source?: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal lines.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLines(startLineNumber: number, endLineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal lines centered vertically.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLinesInCenter(lineNumber: number, endLineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal lines centered vertically only if it lies outside the viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLinesInCenterIfOutsideViewport(lineNumber: number, endLineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically as necessary and reveal lines close to the top of the viewport,
|
|
* optimized for viewing a code definition.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealLinesNearTop(lineNumber: number, endLineNumber: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a range.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealRange(range: IRange, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a range centered vertically.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealRangeInCenter(range: IRange, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a range at the top of the viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealRangeAtTop(range: IRange, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a range centered vertically only if it lies outside the viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealRangeInCenterIfOutsideViewport(range: IRange, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a range close to the top of the viewport,
|
|
* optimized for viewing a code definition.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealRangeNearTop(range: IRange, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll vertically or horizontally as necessary and reveal a range close to the top of the viewport,
|
|
* optimized for viewing a code definition. Only if it lies outside the viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
revealRangeNearTopIfOutsideViewport(range: IRange, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Directly trigger a handler or an editor action.
|
|
* @param source The source of the call.
|
|
* @param handlerId The id of the handler or the id of a contribution.
|
|
* @param payload Extra data to be sent to the handler.
|
|
*/
|
|
trigger(source: string | null | undefined, handlerId: string, payload: any): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets the current model attached to this editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getModel(): IEditorModel | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Sets the current model attached to this editor.
|
|
* If the previous model was created by the editor via the value key in the options
|
|
* literal object, it will be destroyed. Otherwise, if the previous model was set
|
|
* via setModel, or the model key in the options literal object, the previous model
|
|
* will not be destroyed.
|
|
* It is safe to call setModel(null) to simply detach the current model from the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
setModel(model: IEditorModel | null): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a collection of decorations. All decorations added through this collection
|
|
* will get the ownerId of the editor (meaning they will not show up in other editors).
|
|
* These decorations will be automatically cleared when the editor's model changes.
|
|
*/
|
|
createDecorationsCollection(decorations?: IModelDeltaDecoration[]): IEditorDecorationsCollection;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A collection of decorations
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorDecorationsCollection {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when decorations change in the editor,
|
|
* but the change is not caused by us setting or clearing the collection.
|
|
*/
|
|
onDidChange: IEvent<IModelDecorationsChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the decorations count.
|
|
*/
|
|
length: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the range for a decoration.
|
|
*/
|
|
getRange(index: number): Range | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all ranges for decorations.
|
|
*/
|
|
getRanges(): Range[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Determine if a decoration is in this collection.
|
|
*/
|
|
has(decoration: IModelDecoration): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Replace all previous decorations with `newDecorations`.
|
|
*/
|
|
set(newDecorations: readonly IModelDeltaDecoration[]): string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove all previous decorations.
|
|
*/
|
|
clear(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An editor contribution that gets created every time a new editor gets created and gets disposed when the editor gets disposed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorContribution {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Dispose this contribution.
|
|
*/
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Store view state.
|
|
*/
|
|
saveViewState?(): any;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Restore view state.
|
|
*/
|
|
restoreViewState?(state: any): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The type of the `IEditor`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export const EditorType: {
|
|
ICodeEditor: string;
|
|
IDiffEditor: string;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that the current language associated with a model has changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelLanguageChangedEvent {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Previous language
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly oldLanguage: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* New language
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly newLanguage: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Source of the call that caused the event.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly source: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that the language configuration associated with a model has changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelLanguageConfigurationChangedEvent {
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IModelContentChange {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range that got replaced.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly range: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The offset of the range that got replaced.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly rangeOffset: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The length of the range that got replaced.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly rangeLength: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The new text for the range.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly text: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing a change in the text of a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelContentChangedEvent {
|
|
readonly changes: IModelContentChange[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The (new) end-of-line character.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly eol: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The new version id the model has transitioned to.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly versionId: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Flag that indicates that this event was generated while undoing.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly isUndoing: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Flag that indicates that this event was generated while redoing.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly isRedoing: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Flag that indicates that all decorations were lost with this edit.
|
|
* The model has been reset to a new value.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly isFlush: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Flag that indicates that this event describes an eol change.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly isEolChange: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that model decorations have changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IModelDecorationsChangedEvent {
|
|
readonly affectsMinimap: boolean;
|
|
readonly affectsOverviewRuler: boolean;
|
|
readonly affectsGlyphMargin: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IModelOptionsChangedEvent {
|
|
readonly tabSize: boolean;
|
|
readonly indentSize: boolean;
|
|
readonly insertSpaces: boolean;
|
|
readonly trimAutoWhitespace: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes the reason the cursor has changed its position.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum CursorChangeReason {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Unknown or not set.
|
|
*/
|
|
NotSet = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* A `model.setValue()` was called.
|
|
*/
|
|
ContentFlush = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* The `model` has been changed outside of this cursor and the cursor recovers its position from associated markers.
|
|
*/
|
|
RecoverFromMarkers = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* There was an explicit user gesture.
|
|
*/
|
|
Explicit = 3,
|
|
/**
|
|
* There was a Paste.
|
|
*/
|
|
Paste = 4,
|
|
/**
|
|
* There was an Undo.
|
|
*/
|
|
Undo = 5,
|
|
/**
|
|
* There was a Redo.
|
|
*/
|
|
Redo = 6
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that the cursor position has changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICursorPositionChangedEvent {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Primary cursor's position.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Secondary cursors' position.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly secondaryPositions: Position[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Reason.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly reason: CursorChangeReason;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Source of the call that caused the event.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly source: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that the cursor selection has changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICursorSelectionChangedEvent {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The primary selection.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selection: Selection;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The secondary selections.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly secondarySelections: Selection[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The model version id.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly modelVersionId: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The old selections.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly oldSelections: Selection[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The model version id the that `oldSelections` refer to.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly oldModelVersionId: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Source of the call that caused the event.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly source: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Reason.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly reason: CursorChangeReason;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum AccessibilitySupport {
|
|
/**
|
|
* This should be the browser case where it is not known if a screen reader is attached or no.
|
|
*/
|
|
Unknown = 0,
|
|
Disabled = 1,
|
|
Enabled = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for auto closing quotes and brackets
|
|
*/
|
|
export type EditorAutoClosingStrategy = 'always' | 'languageDefined' | 'beforeWhitespace' | 'never';
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for auto wrapping quotes and brackets
|
|
*/
|
|
export type EditorAutoSurroundStrategy = 'languageDefined' | 'quotes' | 'brackets' | 'never';
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for typing over closing quotes or brackets
|
|
*/
|
|
export type EditorAutoClosingEditStrategy = 'always' | 'auto' | 'never';
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for auto indentation in the editor
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum EditorAutoIndentStrategy {
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
Keep = 1,
|
|
Brackets = 2,
|
|
Advanced = 3,
|
|
Full = 4
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* This editor is used inside a diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
inDiffEditor?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The aria label for the editor's textarea (when it is focused).
|
|
*/
|
|
ariaLabel?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control whether a screen reader announces inline suggestion content immediately.
|
|
*/
|
|
screenReaderAnnounceInlineSuggestion?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The `tabindex` property of the editor's textarea
|
|
*/
|
|
tabIndex?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render vertical lines at the specified columns.
|
|
* Defaults to empty array.
|
|
*/
|
|
rulers?: (number | IRulerOption)[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* A string containing the word separators used when doing word navigation.
|
|
* Defaults to `~!@#$%^&*()-=+[{]}\\|;:\'",.<>/?
|
|
*/
|
|
wordSeparators?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable Linux primary clipboard.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
selectionClipboard?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the rendering of line numbers.
|
|
* If it is a function, it will be invoked when rendering a line number and the return value will be rendered.
|
|
* Otherwise, if it is a truthy, line numbers will be rendered normally (equivalent of using an identity function).
|
|
* Otherwise, line numbers will not be rendered.
|
|
* Defaults to `on`.
|
|
*/
|
|
lineNumbers?: LineNumbersType;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the minimal number of visible leading and trailing lines surrounding the cursor.
|
|
* Defaults to 0.
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorSurroundingLines?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls when `cursorSurroundingLines` should be enforced
|
|
* Defaults to `default`, `cursorSurroundingLines` is not enforced when cursor position is changed
|
|
* by mouse.
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorSurroundingLinesStyle?: 'default' | 'all';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render last line number when the file ends with a newline.
|
|
* Defaults to 'on' for Windows and macOS and 'dimmed' for Linux.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderFinalNewline?: 'on' | 'off' | 'dimmed';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove unusual line terminators like LINE SEPARATOR (LS), PARAGRAPH SEPARATOR (PS).
|
|
* Defaults to 'prompt'.
|
|
*/
|
|
unusualLineTerminators?: 'auto' | 'off' | 'prompt';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the corresponding line be selected when clicking on the line number?
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
selectOnLineNumbers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the width of line numbers, by reserving horizontal space for rendering at least an amount of digits.
|
|
* Defaults to 5.
|
|
*/
|
|
lineNumbersMinChars?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the rendering of the glyph margin.
|
|
* Defaults to true in vscode and to false in monaco-editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
glyphMargin?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The width reserved for line decorations (in px).
|
|
* Line decorations are placed between line numbers and the editor content.
|
|
* You can pass in a string in the format floating point followed by "ch". e.g. 1.3ch.
|
|
* Defaults to 10.
|
|
*/
|
|
lineDecorationsWidth?: number | string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* When revealing the cursor, a virtual padding (px) is added to the cursor, turning it into a rectangle.
|
|
* This virtual padding ensures that the cursor gets revealed before hitting the edge of the viewport.
|
|
* Defaults to 30 (px).
|
|
*/
|
|
revealHorizontalRightPadding?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render the editor selection with rounded borders.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
roundedSelection?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Class name to be added to the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
extraEditorClassName?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the editor be read only. See also `domReadOnly`.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
readOnly?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the textarea used for input use the DOM `readonly` attribute.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
domReadOnly?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable linked editing.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
linkedEditing?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* deprecated, use linkedEditing instead
|
|
*/
|
|
renameOnType?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the editor render validation decorations.
|
|
* Defaults to editable.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderValidationDecorations?: 'editable' | 'on' | 'off';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behavior and rendering of the scrollbars.
|
|
*/
|
|
scrollbar?: IEditorScrollbarOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behavior of sticky scroll options
|
|
*/
|
|
stickyScroll?: IEditorStickyScrollOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behavior and rendering of the minimap.
|
|
*/
|
|
minimap?: IEditorMinimapOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behavior of the find widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
find?: IEditorFindOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Display overflow widgets as `fixed`.
|
|
* Defaults to `false`.
|
|
*/
|
|
fixedOverflowWidgets?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The number of vertical lanes the overview ruler should render.
|
|
* Defaults to 3.
|
|
*/
|
|
overviewRulerLanes?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls if a border should be drawn around the overview ruler.
|
|
* Defaults to `true`.
|
|
*/
|
|
overviewRulerBorder?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the cursor animation style, possible values are 'blink', 'smooth', 'phase', 'expand' and 'solid'.
|
|
* Defaults to 'blink'.
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorBlinking?: 'blink' | 'smooth' | 'phase' | 'expand' | 'solid';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Zoom the font in the editor when using the mouse wheel in combination with holding Ctrl.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
mouseWheelZoom?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the mouse pointer style, either 'text' or 'default' or 'copy'
|
|
* Defaults to 'text'
|
|
*/
|
|
mouseStyle?: 'text' | 'default' | 'copy';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable smooth caret animation.
|
|
* Defaults to 'off'.
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorSmoothCaretAnimation?: 'off' | 'explicit' | 'on';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the cursor style, either 'block' or 'line'.
|
|
* Defaults to 'line'.
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorStyle?: 'line' | 'block' | 'underline' | 'line-thin' | 'block-outline' | 'underline-thin';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the width of the cursor when cursorStyle is set to 'line'
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorWidth?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable font ligatures.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
fontLigatures?: boolean | string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable font variations.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
fontVariations?: boolean | string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether to use default color decorations or not using the default document color provider
|
|
*/
|
|
defaultColorDecorators?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Disable the use of `transform: translate3d(0px, 0px, 0px)` for the editor margin and lines layers.
|
|
* The usage of `transform: translate3d(0px, 0px, 0px)` acts as a hint for browsers to create an extra layer.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
disableLayerHinting?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Disable the optimizations for monospace fonts.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
disableMonospaceOptimizations?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the cursor be hidden in the overview ruler.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
hideCursorInOverviewRuler?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable that scrolling can go one screen size after the last line.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
scrollBeyondLastLine?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable that scrolling can go beyond the last column by a number of columns.
|
|
* Defaults to 5.
|
|
*/
|
|
scrollBeyondLastColumn?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable that the editor animates scrolling to a position.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
smoothScrolling?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable that the editor will install a ResizeObserver to check if its container dom node size has changed.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
automaticLayout?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the wrapping of the editor.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "off", the lines will never wrap.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "on", the lines will wrap at the viewport width.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "wordWrapColumn", the lines will wrap at `wordWrapColumn`.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "bounded", the lines will wrap at min(viewport width, wordWrapColumn).
|
|
* Defaults to "off".
|
|
*/
|
|
wordWrap?: 'off' | 'on' | 'wordWrapColumn' | 'bounded';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Override the `wordWrap` setting.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordWrapOverride1?: 'off' | 'on' | 'inherit';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Override the `wordWrapOverride1` setting.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordWrapOverride2?: 'off' | 'on' | 'inherit';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the wrapping of the editor.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "off", the lines will never wrap.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "on", the lines will wrap at the viewport width.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "wordWrapColumn", the lines will wrap at `wordWrapColumn`.
|
|
* When `wordWrap` = "bounded", the lines will wrap at min(viewport width, wordWrapColumn).
|
|
* Defaults to 80.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordWrapColumn?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control indentation of wrapped lines. Can be: 'none', 'same', 'indent' or 'deepIndent'.
|
|
* Defaults to 'same' in vscode and to 'none' in monaco-editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
wrappingIndent?: 'none' | 'same' | 'indent' | 'deepIndent';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the wrapping strategy to use.
|
|
* Defaults to 'simple'.
|
|
*/
|
|
wrappingStrategy?: 'simple' | 'advanced';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure word wrapping characters. A break will be introduced before these characters.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordWrapBreakBeforeCharacters?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure word wrapping characters. A break will be introduced after these characters.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordWrapBreakAfterCharacters?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Sets whether line breaks appear wherever the text would otherwise overflow its content box.
|
|
* When wordBreak = 'normal', Use the default line break rule.
|
|
* When wordBreak = 'keepAll', Word breaks should not be used for Chinese/Japanese/Korean (CJK) text. Non-CJK text behavior is the same as for normal.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordBreak?: 'normal' | 'keepAll';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Performance guard: Stop rendering a line after x characters.
|
|
* Defaults to 10000.
|
|
* Use -1 to never stop rendering
|
|
*/
|
|
stopRenderingLineAfter?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure the editor's hover.
|
|
*/
|
|
hover?: IEditorHoverOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable detecting links and making them clickable.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
links?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable inline color decorators and color picker rendering.
|
|
*/
|
|
colorDecorators?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the max number of color decorators that can be rendered in an editor at once.
|
|
*/
|
|
colorDecoratorsLimit?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behaviour of comments in the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
comments?: IEditorCommentsOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable custom contextmenu.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
contextmenu?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A multiplier to be used on the `deltaX` and `deltaY` of mouse wheel scroll events.
|
|
* Defaults to 1.
|
|
*/
|
|
mouseWheelScrollSensitivity?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* FastScrolling mulitplier speed when pressing `Alt`
|
|
* Defaults to 5.
|
|
*/
|
|
fastScrollSensitivity?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable that the editor scrolls only the predominant axis. Prevents horizontal drift when scrolling vertically on a trackpad.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
scrollPredominantAxis?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable that the selection with the mouse and keys is doing column selection.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
columnSelection?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The modifier to be used to add multiple cursors with the mouse.
|
|
* Defaults to 'alt'
|
|
*/
|
|
multiCursorModifier?: 'ctrlCmd' | 'alt';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Merge overlapping selections.
|
|
* Defaults to true
|
|
*/
|
|
multiCursorMergeOverlapping?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure the behaviour when pasting a text with the line count equal to the cursor count.
|
|
* Defaults to 'spread'.
|
|
*/
|
|
multiCursorPaste?: 'spread' | 'full';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the max number of text cursors that can be in an active editor at once.
|
|
*/
|
|
multiCursorLimit?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure the editor's accessibility support.
|
|
* Defaults to 'auto'. It is best to leave this to 'auto'.
|
|
*/
|
|
accessibilitySupport?: 'auto' | 'off' | 'on';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the number of lines in the editor that can be read out by a screen reader
|
|
*/
|
|
accessibilityPageSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Suggest options.
|
|
*/
|
|
suggest?: ISuggestOptions;
|
|
inlineSuggest?: IInlineSuggestOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Smart select options.
|
|
*/
|
|
smartSelect?: ISmartSelectOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
*
|
|
*/
|
|
gotoLocation?: IGotoLocationOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable quick suggestions (shadow suggestions)
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
quickSuggestions?: boolean | IQuickSuggestionsOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Quick suggestions show delay (in ms)
|
|
* Defaults to 10 (ms)
|
|
*/
|
|
quickSuggestionsDelay?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the spacing around the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
padding?: IEditorPaddingOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Parameter hint options.
|
|
*/
|
|
parameterHints?: IEditorParameterHintOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for auto closing brackets.
|
|
* Defaults to language defined behavior.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoClosingBrackets?: EditorAutoClosingStrategy;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for auto closing quotes.
|
|
* Defaults to language defined behavior.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoClosingQuotes?: EditorAutoClosingStrategy;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for pressing backspace near quotes or bracket pairs.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoClosingDelete?: EditorAutoClosingEditStrategy;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for typing over closing quotes or brackets.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoClosingOvertype?: EditorAutoClosingEditStrategy;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Options for auto surrounding.
|
|
* Defaults to always allowing auto surrounding.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoSurround?: EditorAutoSurroundStrategy;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the editor should automatically adjust the indentation when users type, paste, move or indent lines.
|
|
* Defaults to advanced.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoIndent?: 'none' | 'keep' | 'brackets' | 'advanced' | 'full';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Emulate selection behaviour of tab characters when using spaces for indentation.
|
|
* This means selection will stick to tab stops.
|
|
*/
|
|
stickyTabStops?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable format on type.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
formatOnType?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable format on paste.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
formatOnPaste?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls if the editor should allow to move selections via drag and drop.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
dragAndDrop?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the suggestion box to pop-up on trigger characters.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
suggestOnTriggerCharacters?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Accept suggestions on ENTER.
|
|
* Defaults to 'on'.
|
|
*/
|
|
acceptSuggestionOnEnter?: 'on' | 'smart' | 'off';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Accept suggestions on provider defined characters.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
acceptSuggestionOnCommitCharacter?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable snippet suggestions. Default to 'true'.
|
|
*/
|
|
snippetSuggestions?: 'top' | 'bottom' | 'inline' | 'none';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Copying without a selection copies the current line.
|
|
*/
|
|
emptySelectionClipboard?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Syntax highlighting is copied.
|
|
*/
|
|
copyWithSyntaxHighlighting?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The history mode for suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
suggestSelection?: 'first' | 'recentlyUsed' | 'recentlyUsedByPrefix';
|
|
/**
|
|
* The font size for the suggest widget.
|
|
* Defaults to the editor font size.
|
|
*/
|
|
suggestFontSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line height for the suggest widget.
|
|
* Defaults to the editor line height.
|
|
*/
|
|
suggestLineHeight?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable tab completion.
|
|
*/
|
|
tabCompletion?: 'on' | 'off' | 'onlySnippets';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable selection highlight.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
selectionHighlight?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable semantic occurrences highlight.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
occurrencesHighlight?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show code lens
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
codeLens?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Code lens font family. Defaults to editor font family.
|
|
*/
|
|
codeLensFontFamily?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Code lens font size. Default to 90% of the editor font size
|
|
*/
|
|
codeLensFontSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behavior and rendering of the code action lightbulb.
|
|
*/
|
|
lightbulb?: IEditorLightbulbOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Timeout for running code actions on save.
|
|
*/
|
|
codeActionsOnSaveTimeout?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable code folding.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
folding?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Selects the folding strategy. 'auto' uses the strategies contributed for the current document, 'indentation' uses the indentation based folding strategy.
|
|
* Defaults to 'auto'.
|
|
*/
|
|
foldingStrategy?: 'auto' | 'indentation';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable highlight for folded regions.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
foldingHighlight?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Auto fold imports folding regions.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
foldingImportsByDefault?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Maximum number of foldable regions.
|
|
* Defaults to 5000.
|
|
*/
|
|
foldingMaximumRegions?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the fold actions in the gutter stay always visible or hide unless the mouse is over the gutter.
|
|
* Defaults to 'mouseover'.
|
|
*/
|
|
showFoldingControls?: 'always' | 'never' | 'mouseover';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether clicking on the empty content after a folded line will unfold the line.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
unfoldOnClickAfterEndOfLine?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable highlighting of matching brackets.
|
|
* Defaults to 'always'.
|
|
*/
|
|
matchBrackets?: 'never' | 'near' | 'always';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable experimental whitespace rendering.
|
|
* Defaults to 'svg'.
|
|
*/
|
|
experimentalWhitespaceRendering?: 'svg' | 'font' | 'off';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable rendering of whitespace.
|
|
* Defaults to 'selection'.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderWhitespace?: 'none' | 'boundary' | 'selection' | 'trailing' | 'all';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable rendering of control characters.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderControlCharacters?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable rendering of current line highlight.
|
|
* Defaults to all.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderLineHighlight?: 'none' | 'gutter' | 'line' | 'all';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control if the current line highlight should be rendered only the editor is focused.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderLineHighlightOnlyWhenFocus?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Inserting and deleting whitespace follows tab stops.
|
|
*/
|
|
useTabStops?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The font family
|
|
*/
|
|
fontFamily?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The font weight
|
|
*/
|
|
fontWeight?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The font size
|
|
*/
|
|
fontSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line height
|
|
*/
|
|
lineHeight?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The letter spacing
|
|
*/
|
|
letterSpacing?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls fading out of unused variables.
|
|
*/
|
|
showUnused?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether to focus the inline editor in the peek widget by default.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
peekWidgetDefaultFocus?: 'tree' | 'editor';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the definition link opens element in the peek widget.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
definitionLinkOpensInPeek?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls strikethrough deprecated variables.
|
|
*/
|
|
showDeprecated?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether suggestions allow matches in the middle of the word instead of only at the beginning
|
|
*/
|
|
matchOnWordStartOnly?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the behavior and rendering of the inline hints.
|
|
*/
|
|
inlayHints?: IEditorInlayHintsOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control if the editor should use shadow DOM.
|
|
*/
|
|
useShadowDOM?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the behavior of editor guides.
|
|
*/
|
|
guides?: IGuidesOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls the behavior of the unicode highlight feature
|
|
* (by default, ambiguous and invisible characters are highlighted).
|
|
*/
|
|
unicodeHighlight?: IUnicodeHighlightOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures bracket pair colorization (disabled by default).
|
|
*/
|
|
bracketPairColorization?: IBracketPairColorizationOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls dropping into the editor from an external source.
|
|
*
|
|
* When enabled, this shows a preview of the drop location and triggers an `onDropIntoEditor` event.
|
|
*/
|
|
dropIntoEditor?: IDropIntoEditorOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the editor receives tabs or defers them to the workbench for navigation.
|
|
*/
|
|
tabFocusMode?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IDiffEditorBaseOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Allow the user to resize the diff editor split view.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enableSplitViewResizing?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The default ratio when rendering side-by-side editors.
|
|
* Must be a number between 0 and 1, min sizes apply.
|
|
* Defaults to 0.5
|
|
*/
|
|
splitViewDefaultRatio?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render the differences in two side-by-side editors.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderSideBySide?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Timeout in milliseconds after which diff computation is cancelled.
|
|
* Defaults to 5000.
|
|
*/
|
|
maxComputationTime?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Maximum supported file size in MB.
|
|
* Defaults to 50.
|
|
*/
|
|
maxFileSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Compute the diff by ignoring leading/trailing whitespace
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
ignoreTrimWhitespace?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render +/- indicators for added/deleted changes.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderIndicators?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Shows icons in the glyph margin to revert changes.
|
|
* Default to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderMarginRevertIcon?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Original model should be editable?
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
originalEditable?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the diff editor enable code lens?
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
diffCodeLens?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Is the diff editor should render overview ruler
|
|
* Defaults to true
|
|
*/
|
|
renderOverviewRuler?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the wrapping of the diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
diffWordWrap?: 'off' | 'on' | 'inherit';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Diff Algorithm
|
|
*/
|
|
diffAlgorithm?: 'legacy' | 'advanced' | IDocumentDiffProvider;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Whether the diff editor aria label should be verbose.
|
|
*/
|
|
accessibilityVerbose?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for the diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDiffEditorOptions extends IEditorOptions, IDiffEditorBaseOptions {
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event describing that the configuration of the editor has changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export class ConfigurationChangedEvent {
|
|
hasChanged(id: EditorOption): boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* All computed editor options.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IComputedEditorOptions {
|
|
get<T extends EditorOption>(id: T): FindComputedEditorOptionValueById<T>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IEditorOption<K extends EditorOption, V> {
|
|
readonly id: K;
|
|
readonly name: string;
|
|
defaultValue: V;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Might modify `value`.
|
|
*/
|
|
applyUpdate(value: V | undefined, update: V): ApplyUpdateResult<V>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class ApplyUpdateResult<T> {
|
|
readonly newValue: T;
|
|
readonly didChange: boolean;
|
|
constructor(newValue: T, didChange: boolean);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor comments
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorCommentsOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Insert a space after the line comment token and inside the block comments tokens.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
insertSpace?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Ignore empty lines when inserting line comments.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
ignoreEmptyLines?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The kind of animation in which the editor's cursor should be rendered.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum TextEditorCursorBlinkingStyle {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Hidden
|
|
*/
|
|
Hidden = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Blinking
|
|
*/
|
|
Blink = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Blinking with smooth fading
|
|
*/
|
|
Smooth = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Blinking with prolonged filled state and smooth fading
|
|
*/
|
|
Phase = 3,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Expand collapse animation on the y axis
|
|
*/
|
|
Expand = 4,
|
|
/**
|
|
* No-Blinking
|
|
*/
|
|
Solid = 5
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The style in which the editor's cursor should be rendered.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum TextEditorCursorStyle {
|
|
/**
|
|
* As a vertical line (sitting between two characters).
|
|
*/
|
|
Line = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* As a block (sitting on top of a character).
|
|
*/
|
|
Block = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* As a horizontal line (sitting under a character).
|
|
*/
|
|
Underline = 3,
|
|
/**
|
|
* As a thin vertical line (sitting between two characters).
|
|
*/
|
|
LineThin = 4,
|
|
/**
|
|
* As an outlined block (sitting on top of a character).
|
|
*/
|
|
BlockOutline = 5,
|
|
/**
|
|
* As a thin horizontal line (sitting under a character).
|
|
*/
|
|
UnderlineThin = 6
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor find widget
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorFindOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the cursor should move to find matches while typing.
|
|
*/
|
|
cursorMoveOnType?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls if we seed search string in the Find Widget with editor selection.
|
|
*/
|
|
seedSearchStringFromSelection?: 'never' | 'always' | 'selection';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls if Find in Selection flag is turned on in the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoFindInSelection?: 'never' | 'always' | 'multiline';
|
|
addExtraSpaceOnTop?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether the search result and diff result automatically restarts from the beginning (or the end) when no further matches can be found
|
|
*/
|
|
loop?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type GoToLocationValues = 'peek' | 'gotoAndPeek' | 'goto';
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for go to location
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IGotoLocationOptions {
|
|
multiple?: GoToLocationValues;
|
|
multipleDefinitions?: GoToLocationValues;
|
|
multipleTypeDefinitions?: GoToLocationValues;
|
|
multipleDeclarations?: GoToLocationValues;
|
|
multipleImplementations?: GoToLocationValues;
|
|
multipleReferences?: GoToLocationValues;
|
|
alternativeDefinitionCommand?: string;
|
|
alternativeTypeDefinitionCommand?: string;
|
|
alternativeDeclarationCommand?: string;
|
|
alternativeImplementationCommand?: string;
|
|
alternativeReferenceCommand?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor hover
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorHoverOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the hover.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Delay for showing the hover.
|
|
* Defaults to 300.
|
|
*/
|
|
delay?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Is the hover sticky such that it can be clicked and its contents selected?
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
sticky?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Should the hover be shown above the line if possible?
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
above?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A description for the overview ruler position.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface OverviewRulerPosition {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Width of the overview ruler
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly width: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Height of the overview ruler
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly height: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Top position for the overview ruler
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly top: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Right position for the overview ruler
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly right: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum RenderMinimap {
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
Text = 1,
|
|
Blocks = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The internal layout details of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface EditorLayoutInfo {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Full editor width.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly width: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Full editor height.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly height: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Left position for the glyph margin.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly glyphMarginLeft: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The width of the glyph margin.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly glyphMarginWidth: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The number of decoration lanes to render in the glyph margin.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly glyphMarginDecorationLaneCount: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Left position for the line numbers.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly lineNumbersLeft: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The width of the line numbers.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly lineNumbersWidth: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Left position for the line decorations.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly decorationsLeft: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The width of the line decorations.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly decorationsWidth: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Left position for the content (actual text)
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly contentLeft: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The width of the content (actual text)
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly contentWidth: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Layout information for the minimap
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly minimap: EditorMinimapLayoutInfo;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The number of columns (of typical characters) fitting on a viewport line.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly viewportColumn: number;
|
|
readonly isWordWrapMinified: boolean;
|
|
readonly isViewportWrapping: boolean;
|
|
readonly wrappingColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The width of the vertical scrollbar.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly verticalScrollbarWidth: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The height of the horizontal scrollbar.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly horizontalScrollbarHeight: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The position of the overview ruler.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly overviewRuler: OverviewRulerPosition;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The internal layout details of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface EditorMinimapLayoutInfo {
|
|
readonly renderMinimap: RenderMinimap;
|
|
readonly minimapLeft: number;
|
|
readonly minimapWidth: number;
|
|
readonly minimapHeightIsEditorHeight: boolean;
|
|
readonly minimapIsSampling: boolean;
|
|
readonly minimapScale: number;
|
|
readonly minimapLineHeight: number;
|
|
readonly minimapCanvasInnerWidth: number;
|
|
readonly minimapCanvasInnerHeight: number;
|
|
readonly minimapCanvasOuterWidth: number;
|
|
readonly minimapCanvasOuterHeight: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor lightbulb
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorLightbulbOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the lightbulb code action.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IEditorStickyScrollOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the sticky scroll
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Maximum number of sticky lines to show
|
|
*/
|
|
maxLineCount?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Model to choose for sticky scroll by default
|
|
*/
|
|
defaultModel?: 'outlineModel' | 'foldingProviderModel' | 'indentationModel';
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor inlayHints
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorInlayHintsOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the inline hints.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: 'on' | 'off' | 'offUnlessPressed' | 'onUnlessPressed';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Font size of inline hints.
|
|
* Default to 90% of the editor font size.
|
|
*/
|
|
fontSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Font family of inline hints.
|
|
* Defaults to editor font family.
|
|
*/
|
|
fontFamily?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enables the padding around the inlay hint.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
padding?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor minimap
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorMinimapOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable the rendering of the minimap.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the rendering of minimap.
|
|
*/
|
|
autohide?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the side of the minimap in editor.
|
|
* Defaults to 'right'.
|
|
*/
|
|
side?: 'right' | 'left';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the minimap rendering mode.
|
|
* Defaults to 'actual'.
|
|
*/
|
|
size?: 'proportional' | 'fill' | 'fit';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Control the rendering of the minimap slider.
|
|
* Defaults to 'mouseover'.
|
|
*/
|
|
showSlider?: 'always' | 'mouseover';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render the actual text on a line (as opposed to color blocks).
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
renderCharacters?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Limit the width of the minimap to render at most a certain number of columns.
|
|
* Defaults to 120.
|
|
*/
|
|
maxColumn?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Relative size of the font in the minimap. Defaults to 1.
|
|
*/
|
|
scale?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor padding
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorPaddingOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Spacing between top edge of editor and first line.
|
|
*/
|
|
top?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Spacing between bottom edge of editor and last line.
|
|
*/
|
|
bottom?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for parameter hints
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorParameterHintOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable parameter hints.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable cycling of parameter hints.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
cycle?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type QuickSuggestionsValue = 'on' | 'inline' | 'off';
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for quick suggestions
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IQuickSuggestionsOptions {
|
|
other?: boolean | QuickSuggestionsValue;
|
|
comments?: boolean | QuickSuggestionsValue;
|
|
strings?: boolean | QuickSuggestionsValue;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InternalQuickSuggestionsOptions {
|
|
readonly other: QuickSuggestionsValue;
|
|
readonly comments: QuickSuggestionsValue;
|
|
readonly strings: QuickSuggestionsValue;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type LineNumbersType = 'on' | 'off' | 'relative' | 'interval' | ((lineNumber: number) => string);
|
|
|
|
export enum RenderLineNumbersType {
|
|
Off = 0,
|
|
On = 1,
|
|
Relative = 2,
|
|
Interval = 3,
|
|
Custom = 4
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InternalEditorRenderLineNumbersOptions {
|
|
readonly renderType: RenderLineNumbersType;
|
|
readonly renderFn: ((lineNumber: number) => string) | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IRulerOption {
|
|
readonly column: number;
|
|
readonly color: string | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor scrollbars
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorScrollbarOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The size of arrows (if displayed).
|
|
* Defaults to 11.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
arrowSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render vertical scrollbar.
|
|
* Defaults to 'auto'.
|
|
*/
|
|
vertical?: 'auto' | 'visible' | 'hidden';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render horizontal scrollbar.
|
|
* Defaults to 'auto'.
|
|
*/
|
|
horizontal?: 'auto' | 'visible' | 'hidden';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Cast horizontal and vertical shadows when the content is scrolled.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
useShadows?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render arrows at the top and bottom of the vertical scrollbar.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
verticalHasArrows?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render arrows at the left and right of the horizontal scrollbar.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
horizontalHasArrows?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Listen to mouse wheel events and react to them by scrolling.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
handleMouseWheel?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Always consume mouse wheel events (always call preventDefault() and stopPropagation() on the browser events).
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
alwaysConsumeMouseWheel?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Height in pixels for the horizontal scrollbar.
|
|
* Defaults to 10 (px).
|
|
*/
|
|
horizontalScrollbarSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Width in pixels for the vertical scrollbar.
|
|
* Defaults to 10 (px).
|
|
*/
|
|
verticalScrollbarSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Width in pixels for the vertical slider.
|
|
* Defaults to `verticalScrollbarSize`.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
verticalSliderSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Height in pixels for the horizontal slider.
|
|
* Defaults to `horizontalScrollbarSize`.
|
|
* **NOTE**: This option cannot be updated using `updateOptions()`
|
|
*/
|
|
horizontalSliderSize?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Scroll gutter clicks move by page vs jump to position.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
scrollByPage?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InternalEditorScrollbarOptions {
|
|
readonly arrowSize: number;
|
|
readonly vertical: ScrollbarVisibility;
|
|
readonly horizontal: ScrollbarVisibility;
|
|
readonly useShadows: boolean;
|
|
readonly verticalHasArrows: boolean;
|
|
readonly horizontalHasArrows: boolean;
|
|
readonly handleMouseWheel: boolean;
|
|
readonly alwaysConsumeMouseWheel: boolean;
|
|
readonly horizontalScrollbarSize: number;
|
|
readonly horizontalSliderSize: number;
|
|
readonly verticalScrollbarSize: number;
|
|
readonly verticalSliderSize: number;
|
|
readonly scrollByPage: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type InUntrustedWorkspace = 'inUntrustedWorkspace';
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for unicode highlighting.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IUnicodeHighlightOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether all non-basic ASCII characters are highlighted. Only characters between U+0020 and U+007E, tab, line-feed and carriage-return are considered basic ASCII.
|
|
*/
|
|
nonBasicASCII?: boolean | InUntrustedWorkspace;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether characters that just reserve space or have no width at all are highlighted.
|
|
*/
|
|
invisibleCharacters?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether characters are highlighted that can be confused with basic ASCII characters, except those that are common in the current user locale.
|
|
*/
|
|
ambiguousCharacters?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether characters in comments should also be subject to unicode highlighting.
|
|
*/
|
|
includeComments?: boolean | InUntrustedWorkspace;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether characters in strings should also be subject to unicode highlighting.
|
|
*/
|
|
includeStrings?: boolean | InUntrustedWorkspace;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines allowed characters that are not being highlighted.
|
|
*/
|
|
allowedCharacters?: Record<string, true>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Unicode characters that are common in allowed locales are not being highlighted.
|
|
*/
|
|
allowedLocales?: Record<string | '_os' | '_vscode', true>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IInlineSuggestOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable or disable the rendering of automatic inline completions.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures the mode.
|
|
* Use `prefix` to only show ghost text if the text to replace is a prefix of the suggestion text.
|
|
* Use `subword` to only show ghost text if the replace text is a subword of the suggestion text.
|
|
* Use `subwordSmart` to only show ghost text if the replace text is a subword of the suggestion text, but the subword must start after the cursor position.
|
|
* Defaults to `prefix`.
|
|
*/
|
|
mode?: 'prefix' | 'subword' | 'subwordSmart';
|
|
showToolbar?: 'always' | 'onHover';
|
|
suppressSuggestions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Does not clear active inline suggestions when the editor loses focus.
|
|
*/
|
|
keepOnBlur?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IBracketPairColorizationOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable or disable bracket pair colorization.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Use independent color pool per bracket type.
|
|
*/
|
|
independentColorPoolPerBracketType?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IGuidesOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable rendering of bracket pair guides.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
bracketPairs?: boolean | 'active';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable rendering of vertical bracket pair guides.
|
|
* Defaults to 'active'.
|
|
*/
|
|
bracketPairsHorizontal?: boolean | 'active';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable highlighting of the active bracket pair.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
highlightActiveBracketPair?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable rendering of indent guides.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
indentation?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable highlighting of the active indent guide.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
highlightActiveIndentation?: boolean | 'always';
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor suggest widget
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ISuggestOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Overwrite word ends on accept. Default to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
insertMode?: 'insert' | 'replace';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable graceful matching. Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
filterGraceful?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Prevent quick suggestions when a snippet is active. Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
snippetsPreventQuickSuggestions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Favors words that appear close to the cursor.
|
|
*/
|
|
localityBonus?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable using global storage for remembering suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
shareSuggestSelections?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Select suggestions when triggered via quick suggest or trigger characters
|
|
*/
|
|
selectionMode?: 'always' | 'never' | 'whenTriggerCharacter' | 'whenQuickSuggestion';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable or disable icons in suggestions. Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
showIcons?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable or disable the suggest status bar.
|
|
*/
|
|
showStatusBar?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable or disable the rendering of the suggestion preview.
|
|
*/
|
|
preview?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures the mode of the preview.
|
|
*/
|
|
previewMode?: 'prefix' | 'subword' | 'subwordSmart';
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show details inline with the label. Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
showInlineDetails?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show method-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showMethods?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show function-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showFunctions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show constructor-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showConstructors?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show deprecated-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showDeprecated?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls whether suggestions allow matches in the middle of the word instead of only at the beginning
|
|
*/
|
|
matchOnWordStartOnly?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show field-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showFields?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show variable-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showVariables?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show class-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showClasses?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show struct-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showStructs?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show interface-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showInterfaces?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show module-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showModules?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show property-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showProperties?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show event-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showEvents?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show operator-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showOperators?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show unit-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showUnits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show value-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showValues?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show constant-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showConstants?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show enum-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showEnums?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show enumMember-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showEnumMembers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show keyword-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showKeywords?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show text-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showWords?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show color-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showColors?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show file-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showFiles?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show reference-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showReferences?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show folder-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showFolders?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show typeParameter-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showTypeParameters?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show issue-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showIssues?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show user-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showUsers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Show snippet-suggestions.
|
|
*/
|
|
showSnippets?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface ISmartSelectOptions {
|
|
selectLeadingAndTrailingWhitespace?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes how to indent wrapped lines.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum WrappingIndent {
|
|
/**
|
|
* No indentation => wrapped lines begin at column 1.
|
|
*/
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Same => wrapped lines get the same indentation as the parent.
|
|
*/
|
|
Same = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Indent => wrapped lines get +1 indentation toward the parent.
|
|
*/
|
|
Indent = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* DeepIndent => wrapped lines get +2 indentation toward the parent.
|
|
*/
|
|
DeepIndent = 3
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface EditorWrappingInfo {
|
|
readonly isDominatedByLongLines: boolean;
|
|
readonly isWordWrapMinified: boolean;
|
|
readonly isViewportWrapping: boolean;
|
|
readonly wrappingColumn: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configuration options for editor drop into behavior
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDropIntoEditorOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Enable dropping into editor.
|
|
* Defaults to true.
|
|
*/
|
|
enabled?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Controls if a widget is shown after a drop.
|
|
* Defaults to 'afterDrop'.
|
|
*/
|
|
showDropSelector?: 'afterDrop' | 'never';
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum EditorOption {
|
|
acceptSuggestionOnCommitCharacter = 0,
|
|
acceptSuggestionOnEnter = 1,
|
|
accessibilitySupport = 2,
|
|
accessibilityPageSize = 3,
|
|
ariaLabel = 4,
|
|
autoClosingBrackets = 5,
|
|
screenReaderAnnounceInlineSuggestion = 6,
|
|
autoClosingDelete = 7,
|
|
autoClosingOvertype = 8,
|
|
autoClosingQuotes = 9,
|
|
autoIndent = 10,
|
|
automaticLayout = 11,
|
|
autoSurround = 12,
|
|
bracketPairColorization = 13,
|
|
guides = 14,
|
|
codeLens = 15,
|
|
codeLensFontFamily = 16,
|
|
codeLensFontSize = 17,
|
|
colorDecorators = 18,
|
|
colorDecoratorsLimit = 19,
|
|
columnSelection = 20,
|
|
comments = 21,
|
|
contextmenu = 22,
|
|
copyWithSyntaxHighlighting = 23,
|
|
cursorBlinking = 24,
|
|
cursorSmoothCaretAnimation = 25,
|
|
cursorStyle = 26,
|
|
cursorSurroundingLines = 27,
|
|
cursorSurroundingLinesStyle = 28,
|
|
cursorWidth = 29,
|
|
disableLayerHinting = 30,
|
|
disableMonospaceOptimizations = 31,
|
|
domReadOnly = 32,
|
|
dragAndDrop = 33,
|
|
dropIntoEditor = 34,
|
|
emptySelectionClipboard = 35,
|
|
experimentalWhitespaceRendering = 36,
|
|
extraEditorClassName = 37,
|
|
fastScrollSensitivity = 38,
|
|
find = 39,
|
|
fixedOverflowWidgets = 40,
|
|
folding = 41,
|
|
foldingStrategy = 42,
|
|
foldingHighlight = 43,
|
|
foldingImportsByDefault = 44,
|
|
foldingMaximumRegions = 45,
|
|
unfoldOnClickAfterEndOfLine = 46,
|
|
fontFamily = 47,
|
|
fontInfo = 48,
|
|
fontLigatures = 49,
|
|
fontSize = 50,
|
|
fontWeight = 51,
|
|
fontVariations = 52,
|
|
formatOnPaste = 53,
|
|
formatOnType = 54,
|
|
glyphMargin = 55,
|
|
gotoLocation = 56,
|
|
hideCursorInOverviewRuler = 57,
|
|
hover = 58,
|
|
inDiffEditor = 59,
|
|
inlineSuggest = 60,
|
|
letterSpacing = 61,
|
|
lightbulb = 62,
|
|
lineDecorationsWidth = 63,
|
|
lineHeight = 64,
|
|
lineNumbers = 65,
|
|
lineNumbersMinChars = 66,
|
|
linkedEditing = 67,
|
|
links = 68,
|
|
matchBrackets = 69,
|
|
minimap = 70,
|
|
mouseStyle = 71,
|
|
mouseWheelScrollSensitivity = 72,
|
|
mouseWheelZoom = 73,
|
|
multiCursorMergeOverlapping = 74,
|
|
multiCursorModifier = 75,
|
|
multiCursorPaste = 76,
|
|
multiCursorLimit = 77,
|
|
occurrencesHighlight = 78,
|
|
overviewRulerBorder = 79,
|
|
overviewRulerLanes = 80,
|
|
padding = 81,
|
|
parameterHints = 82,
|
|
peekWidgetDefaultFocus = 83,
|
|
definitionLinkOpensInPeek = 84,
|
|
quickSuggestions = 85,
|
|
quickSuggestionsDelay = 86,
|
|
readOnly = 87,
|
|
renameOnType = 88,
|
|
renderControlCharacters = 89,
|
|
renderFinalNewline = 90,
|
|
renderLineHighlight = 91,
|
|
renderLineHighlightOnlyWhenFocus = 92,
|
|
renderValidationDecorations = 93,
|
|
renderWhitespace = 94,
|
|
revealHorizontalRightPadding = 95,
|
|
roundedSelection = 96,
|
|
rulers = 97,
|
|
scrollbar = 98,
|
|
scrollBeyondLastColumn = 99,
|
|
scrollBeyondLastLine = 100,
|
|
scrollPredominantAxis = 101,
|
|
selectionClipboard = 102,
|
|
selectionHighlight = 103,
|
|
selectOnLineNumbers = 104,
|
|
showFoldingControls = 105,
|
|
showUnused = 106,
|
|
snippetSuggestions = 107,
|
|
smartSelect = 108,
|
|
smoothScrolling = 109,
|
|
stickyScroll = 110,
|
|
stickyTabStops = 111,
|
|
stopRenderingLineAfter = 112,
|
|
suggest = 113,
|
|
suggestFontSize = 114,
|
|
suggestLineHeight = 115,
|
|
suggestOnTriggerCharacters = 116,
|
|
suggestSelection = 117,
|
|
tabCompletion = 118,
|
|
tabIndex = 119,
|
|
unicodeHighlighting = 120,
|
|
unusualLineTerminators = 121,
|
|
useShadowDOM = 122,
|
|
useTabStops = 123,
|
|
wordBreak = 124,
|
|
wordSeparators = 125,
|
|
wordWrap = 126,
|
|
wordWrapBreakAfterCharacters = 127,
|
|
wordWrapBreakBeforeCharacters = 128,
|
|
wordWrapColumn = 129,
|
|
wordWrapOverride1 = 130,
|
|
wordWrapOverride2 = 131,
|
|
wrappingIndent = 132,
|
|
wrappingStrategy = 133,
|
|
showDeprecated = 134,
|
|
inlayHints = 135,
|
|
editorClassName = 136,
|
|
pixelRatio = 137,
|
|
tabFocusMode = 138,
|
|
layoutInfo = 139,
|
|
wrappingInfo = 140,
|
|
defaultColorDecorators = 141
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export const EditorOptions: {
|
|
acceptSuggestionOnCommitCharacter: IEditorOption<EditorOption.acceptSuggestionOnCommitCharacter, boolean>;
|
|
acceptSuggestionOnEnter: IEditorOption<EditorOption.acceptSuggestionOnEnter, 'on' | 'off' | 'smart'>;
|
|
accessibilitySupport: IEditorOption<EditorOption.accessibilitySupport, AccessibilitySupport>;
|
|
accessibilityPageSize: IEditorOption<EditorOption.accessibilityPageSize, number>;
|
|
ariaLabel: IEditorOption<EditorOption.ariaLabel, string>;
|
|
screenReaderAnnounceInlineSuggestion: IEditorOption<EditorOption.screenReaderAnnounceInlineSuggestion, boolean>;
|
|
autoClosingBrackets: IEditorOption<EditorOption.autoClosingBrackets, 'always' | 'languageDefined' | 'beforeWhitespace' | 'never'>;
|
|
autoClosingDelete: IEditorOption<EditorOption.autoClosingDelete, 'always' | 'never' | 'auto'>;
|
|
autoClosingOvertype: IEditorOption<EditorOption.autoClosingOvertype, 'always' | 'never' | 'auto'>;
|
|
autoClosingQuotes: IEditorOption<EditorOption.autoClosingQuotes, 'always' | 'languageDefined' | 'beforeWhitespace' | 'never'>;
|
|
autoIndent: IEditorOption<EditorOption.autoIndent, EditorAutoIndentStrategy>;
|
|
automaticLayout: IEditorOption<EditorOption.automaticLayout, boolean>;
|
|
autoSurround: IEditorOption<EditorOption.autoSurround, 'languageDefined' | 'never' | 'quotes' | 'brackets'>;
|
|
bracketPairColorization: IEditorOption<EditorOption.bracketPairColorization, Readonly<Required<IBracketPairColorizationOptions>>>;
|
|
bracketPairGuides: IEditorOption<EditorOption.guides, Readonly<Required<IGuidesOptions>>>;
|
|
stickyTabStops: IEditorOption<EditorOption.stickyTabStops, boolean>;
|
|
codeLens: IEditorOption<EditorOption.codeLens, boolean>;
|
|
codeLensFontFamily: IEditorOption<EditorOption.codeLensFontFamily, string>;
|
|
codeLensFontSize: IEditorOption<EditorOption.codeLensFontSize, number>;
|
|
colorDecorators: IEditorOption<EditorOption.colorDecorators, boolean>;
|
|
colorDecoratorsLimit: IEditorOption<EditorOption.colorDecoratorsLimit, number>;
|
|
columnSelection: IEditorOption<EditorOption.columnSelection, boolean>;
|
|
comments: IEditorOption<EditorOption.comments, Readonly<Required<IEditorCommentsOptions>>>;
|
|
contextmenu: IEditorOption<EditorOption.contextmenu, boolean>;
|
|
copyWithSyntaxHighlighting: IEditorOption<EditorOption.copyWithSyntaxHighlighting, boolean>;
|
|
cursorBlinking: IEditorOption<EditorOption.cursorBlinking, TextEditorCursorBlinkingStyle>;
|
|
cursorSmoothCaretAnimation: IEditorOption<EditorOption.cursorSmoothCaretAnimation, 'on' | 'off' | 'explicit'>;
|
|
cursorStyle: IEditorOption<EditorOption.cursorStyle, TextEditorCursorStyle>;
|
|
cursorSurroundingLines: IEditorOption<EditorOption.cursorSurroundingLines, number>;
|
|
cursorSurroundingLinesStyle: IEditorOption<EditorOption.cursorSurroundingLinesStyle, 'default' | 'all'>;
|
|
cursorWidth: IEditorOption<EditorOption.cursorWidth, number>;
|
|
disableLayerHinting: IEditorOption<EditorOption.disableLayerHinting, boolean>;
|
|
disableMonospaceOptimizations: IEditorOption<EditorOption.disableMonospaceOptimizations, boolean>;
|
|
domReadOnly: IEditorOption<EditorOption.domReadOnly, boolean>;
|
|
dragAndDrop: IEditorOption<EditorOption.dragAndDrop, boolean>;
|
|
emptySelectionClipboard: IEditorOption<EditorOption.emptySelectionClipboard, boolean>;
|
|
dropIntoEditor: IEditorOption<EditorOption.dropIntoEditor, Readonly<Required<IDropIntoEditorOptions>>>;
|
|
stickyScroll: IEditorOption<EditorOption.stickyScroll, Readonly<Required<IEditorStickyScrollOptions>>>;
|
|
experimentalWhitespaceRendering: IEditorOption<EditorOption.experimentalWhitespaceRendering, 'off' | 'svg' | 'font'>;
|
|
extraEditorClassName: IEditorOption<EditorOption.extraEditorClassName, string>;
|
|
fastScrollSensitivity: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fastScrollSensitivity, number>;
|
|
find: IEditorOption<EditorOption.find, Readonly<Required<IEditorFindOptions>>>;
|
|
fixedOverflowWidgets: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fixedOverflowWidgets, boolean>;
|
|
folding: IEditorOption<EditorOption.folding, boolean>;
|
|
foldingStrategy: IEditorOption<EditorOption.foldingStrategy, 'auto' | 'indentation'>;
|
|
foldingHighlight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.foldingHighlight, boolean>;
|
|
foldingImportsByDefault: IEditorOption<EditorOption.foldingImportsByDefault, boolean>;
|
|
foldingMaximumRegions: IEditorOption<EditorOption.foldingMaximumRegions, number>;
|
|
unfoldOnClickAfterEndOfLine: IEditorOption<EditorOption.unfoldOnClickAfterEndOfLine, boolean>;
|
|
fontFamily: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fontFamily, string>;
|
|
fontInfo: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fontInfo, FontInfo>;
|
|
fontLigatures2: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fontLigatures, string>;
|
|
fontSize: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fontSize, number>;
|
|
fontWeight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fontWeight, string>;
|
|
fontVariations: IEditorOption<EditorOption.fontVariations, string>;
|
|
formatOnPaste: IEditorOption<EditorOption.formatOnPaste, boolean>;
|
|
formatOnType: IEditorOption<EditorOption.formatOnType, boolean>;
|
|
glyphMargin: IEditorOption<EditorOption.glyphMargin, boolean>;
|
|
gotoLocation: IEditorOption<EditorOption.gotoLocation, Readonly<Required<IGotoLocationOptions>>>;
|
|
hideCursorInOverviewRuler: IEditorOption<EditorOption.hideCursorInOverviewRuler, boolean>;
|
|
hover: IEditorOption<EditorOption.hover, Readonly<Required<IEditorHoverOptions>>>;
|
|
inDiffEditor: IEditorOption<EditorOption.inDiffEditor, boolean>;
|
|
letterSpacing: IEditorOption<EditorOption.letterSpacing, number>;
|
|
lightbulb: IEditorOption<EditorOption.lightbulb, Readonly<Required<IEditorLightbulbOptions>>>;
|
|
lineDecorationsWidth: IEditorOption<EditorOption.lineDecorationsWidth, number>;
|
|
lineHeight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.lineHeight, number>;
|
|
lineNumbers: IEditorOption<EditorOption.lineNumbers, InternalEditorRenderLineNumbersOptions>;
|
|
lineNumbersMinChars: IEditorOption<EditorOption.lineNumbersMinChars, number>;
|
|
linkedEditing: IEditorOption<EditorOption.linkedEditing, boolean>;
|
|
links: IEditorOption<EditorOption.links, boolean>;
|
|
matchBrackets: IEditorOption<EditorOption.matchBrackets, 'always' | 'never' | 'near'>;
|
|
minimap: IEditorOption<EditorOption.minimap, Readonly<Required<IEditorMinimapOptions>>>;
|
|
mouseStyle: IEditorOption<EditorOption.mouseStyle, 'default' | 'text' | 'copy'>;
|
|
mouseWheelScrollSensitivity: IEditorOption<EditorOption.mouseWheelScrollSensitivity, number>;
|
|
mouseWheelZoom: IEditorOption<EditorOption.mouseWheelZoom, boolean>;
|
|
multiCursorMergeOverlapping: IEditorOption<EditorOption.multiCursorMergeOverlapping, boolean>;
|
|
multiCursorModifier: IEditorOption<EditorOption.multiCursorModifier, 'altKey' | 'metaKey' | 'ctrlKey'>;
|
|
multiCursorPaste: IEditorOption<EditorOption.multiCursorPaste, 'spread' | 'full'>;
|
|
multiCursorLimit: IEditorOption<EditorOption.multiCursorLimit, number>;
|
|
occurrencesHighlight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.occurrencesHighlight, boolean>;
|
|
overviewRulerBorder: IEditorOption<EditorOption.overviewRulerBorder, boolean>;
|
|
overviewRulerLanes: IEditorOption<EditorOption.overviewRulerLanes, number>;
|
|
padding: IEditorOption<EditorOption.padding, Readonly<Required<IEditorPaddingOptions>>>;
|
|
parameterHints: IEditorOption<EditorOption.parameterHints, Readonly<Required<IEditorParameterHintOptions>>>;
|
|
peekWidgetDefaultFocus: IEditorOption<EditorOption.peekWidgetDefaultFocus, 'tree' | 'editor'>;
|
|
definitionLinkOpensInPeek: IEditorOption<EditorOption.definitionLinkOpensInPeek, boolean>;
|
|
quickSuggestions: IEditorOption<EditorOption.quickSuggestions, InternalQuickSuggestionsOptions>;
|
|
quickSuggestionsDelay: IEditorOption<EditorOption.quickSuggestionsDelay, number>;
|
|
readOnly: IEditorOption<EditorOption.readOnly, boolean>;
|
|
renameOnType: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renameOnType, boolean>;
|
|
renderControlCharacters: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renderControlCharacters, boolean>;
|
|
renderFinalNewline: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renderFinalNewline, 'on' | 'off' | 'dimmed'>;
|
|
renderLineHighlight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renderLineHighlight, 'all' | 'line' | 'none' | 'gutter'>;
|
|
renderLineHighlightOnlyWhenFocus: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renderLineHighlightOnlyWhenFocus, boolean>;
|
|
renderValidationDecorations: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renderValidationDecorations, 'on' | 'off' | 'editable'>;
|
|
renderWhitespace: IEditorOption<EditorOption.renderWhitespace, 'all' | 'none' | 'boundary' | 'selection' | 'trailing'>;
|
|
revealHorizontalRightPadding: IEditorOption<EditorOption.revealHorizontalRightPadding, number>;
|
|
roundedSelection: IEditorOption<EditorOption.roundedSelection, boolean>;
|
|
rulers: IEditorOption<EditorOption.rulers, {}>;
|
|
scrollbar: IEditorOption<EditorOption.scrollbar, InternalEditorScrollbarOptions>;
|
|
scrollBeyondLastColumn: IEditorOption<EditorOption.scrollBeyondLastColumn, number>;
|
|
scrollBeyondLastLine: IEditorOption<EditorOption.scrollBeyondLastLine, boolean>;
|
|
scrollPredominantAxis: IEditorOption<EditorOption.scrollPredominantAxis, boolean>;
|
|
selectionClipboard: IEditorOption<EditorOption.selectionClipboard, boolean>;
|
|
selectionHighlight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.selectionHighlight, boolean>;
|
|
selectOnLineNumbers: IEditorOption<EditorOption.selectOnLineNumbers, boolean>;
|
|
showFoldingControls: IEditorOption<EditorOption.showFoldingControls, 'always' | 'never' | 'mouseover'>;
|
|
showUnused: IEditorOption<EditorOption.showUnused, boolean>;
|
|
showDeprecated: IEditorOption<EditorOption.showDeprecated, boolean>;
|
|
inlayHints: IEditorOption<EditorOption.inlayHints, Readonly<Required<IEditorInlayHintsOptions>>>;
|
|
snippetSuggestions: IEditorOption<EditorOption.snippetSuggestions, 'none' | 'top' | 'bottom' | 'inline'>;
|
|
smartSelect: IEditorOption<EditorOption.smartSelect, Readonly<Required<ISmartSelectOptions>>>;
|
|
smoothScrolling: IEditorOption<EditorOption.smoothScrolling, boolean>;
|
|
stopRenderingLineAfter: IEditorOption<EditorOption.stopRenderingLineAfter, number>;
|
|
suggest: IEditorOption<EditorOption.suggest, Readonly<Required<ISuggestOptions>>>;
|
|
inlineSuggest: IEditorOption<EditorOption.inlineSuggest, Readonly<Required<IInlineSuggestOptions>>>;
|
|
suggestFontSize: IEditorOption<EditorOption.suggestFontSize, number>;
|
|
suggestLineHeight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.suggestLineHeight, number>;
|
|
suggestOnTriggerCharacters: IEditorOption<EditorOption.suggestOnTriggerCharacters, boolean>;
|
|
suggestSelection: IEditorOption<EditorOption.suggestSelection, 'first' | 'recentlyUsed' | 'recentlyUsedByPrefix'>;
|
|
tabCompletion: IEditorOption<EditorOption.tabCompletion, 'on' | 'off' | 'onlySnippets'>;
|
|
tabIndex: IEditorOption<EditorOption.tabIndex, number>;
|
|
unicodeHighlight: IEditorOption<EditorOption.unicodeHighlighting, any>;
|
|
unusualLineTerminators: IEditorOption<EditorOption.unusualLineTerminators, 'auto' | 'off' | 'prompt'>;
|
|
useShadowDOM: IEditorOption<EditorOption.useShadowDOM, boolean>;
|
|
useTabStops: IEditorOption<EditorOption.useTabStops, boolean>;
|
|
wordBreak: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordBreak, 'normal' | 'keepAll'>;
|
|
wordSeparators: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordSeparators, string>;
|
|
wordWrap: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordWrap, 'on' | 'off' | 'wordWrapColumn' | 'bounded'>;
|
|
wordWrapBreakAfterCharacters: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordWrapBreakAfterCharacters, string>;
|
|
wordWrapBreakBeforeCharacters: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordWrapBreakBeforeCharacters, string>;
|
|
wordWrapColumn: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordWrapColumn, number>;
|
|
wordWrapOverride1: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordWrapOverride1, 'on' | 'off' | 'inherit'>;
|
|
wordWrapOverride2: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wordWrapOverride2, 'on' | 'off' | 'inherit'>;
|
|
editorClassName: IEditorOption<EditorOption.editorClassName, string>;
|
|
defaultColorDecorators: IEditorOption<EditorOption.defaultColorDecorators, boolean>;
|
|
pixelRatio: IEditorOption<EditorOption.pixelRatio, number>;
|
|
tabFocusMode: IEditorOption<EditorOption.tabFocusMode, boolean>;
|
|
layoutInfo: IEditorOption<EditorOption.layoutInfo, EditorLayoutInfo>;
|
|
wrappingInfo: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wrappingInfo, EditorWrappingInfo>;
|
|
wrappingIndent: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wrappingIndent, WrappingIndent>;
|
|
wrappingStrategy: IEditorOption<EditorOption.wrappingStrategy, 'simple' | 'advanced'>;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
type EditorOptionsType = typeof EditorOptions;
|
|
|
|
type FindEditorOptionsKeyById<T extends EditorOption> = {
|
|
[K in keyof EditorOptionsType]: EditorOptionsType[K]['id'] extends T ? K : never;
|
|
}[keyof EditorOptionsType];
|
|
|
|
type ComputedEditorOptionValue<T extends IEditorOption<any, any>> = T extends IEditorOption<any, infer R> ? R : never;
|
|
|
|
export type FindComputedEditorOptionValueById<T extends EditorOption> = NonNullable<ComputedEditorOptionValue<EditorOptionsType[FindEditorOptionsKeyById<T>]>>;
|
|
|
|
export interface IEditorConstructionOptions extends IEditorOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial editor dimension (to avoid measuring the container).
|
|
*/
|
|
dimension?: IDimension;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Place overflow widgets inside an external DOM node.
|
|
* Defaults to an internal DOM node.
|
|
*/
|
|
overflowWidgetsDomNode?: HTMLElement;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A view zone is a full horizontal rectangle that 'pushes' text down.
|
|
* The editor reserves space for view zones when rendering.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IViewZone {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line number after which this zone should appear.
|
|
* Use 0 to place a view zone before the first line number.
|
|
*/
|
|
afterLineNumber: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The column after which this zone should appear.
|
|
* If not set, the maxLineColumn of `afterLineNumber` will be used.
|
|
* This is relevant for wrapped lines.
|
|
*/
|
|
afterColumn?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If the `afterColumn` has multiple view columns, the affinity specifies which one to use. Defaults to `none`.
|
|
*/
|
|
afterColumnAffinity?: PositionAffinity;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render the zone even when its line is hidden.
|
|
*/
|
|
showInHiddenAreas?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Tiebreaker that is used when multiple view zones want to be after the same line.
|
|
* Defaults to `afterColumn` otherwise 10000;
|
|
*/
|
|
ordinal?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Suppress mouse down events.
|
|
* If set, the editor will attach a mouse down listener to the view zone and .preventDefault on it.
|
|
* Defaults to false
|
|
*/
|
|
suppressMouseDown?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The height in lines of the view zone.
|
|
* If specified, `heightInPx` will be used instead of this.
|
|
* If neither `heightInPx` nor `heightInLines` is specified, a default of `heightInLines` = 1 will be chosen.
|
|
*/
|
|
heightInLines?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The height in px of the view zone.
|
|
* If this is set, the editor will give preference to it rather than `heightInLines` above.
|
|
* If neither `heightInPx` nor `heightInLines` is specified, a default of `heightInLines` = 1 will be chosen.
|
|
*/
|
|
heightInPx?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The minimum width in px of the view zone.
|
|
* If this is set, the editor will ensure that the scroll width is >= than this value.
|
|
*/
|
|
minWidthInPx?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The dom node of the view zone
|
|
*/
|
|
domNode: HTMLElement;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional dom node for the view zone that will be placed in the margin area.
|
|
*/
|
|
marginDomNode?: HTMLElement | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Callback which gives the relative top of the view zone as it appears (taking scrolling into account).
|
|
*/
|
|
onDomNodeTop?: (top: number) => void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Callback which gives the height in pixels of the view zone.
|
|
*/
|
|
onComputedHeight?: (height: number) => void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An accessor that allows for zones to be added or removed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IViewZoneChangeAccessor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create a new view zone.
|
|
* @param zone Zone to create
|
|
* @return A unique identifier to the view zone.
|
|
*/
|
|
addZone(zone: IViewZone): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove a zone
|
|
* @param id A unique identifier to the view zone, as returned by the `addZone` call.
|
|
*/
|
|
removeZone(id: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change a zone's position.
|
|
* The editor will rescan the `afterLineNumber` and `afterColumn` properties of a view zone.
|
|
*/
|
|
layoutZone(id: string): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A positioning preference for rendering content widgets.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum ContentWidgetPositionPreference {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Place the content widget exactly at a position
|
|
*/
|
|
EXACT = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Place the content widget above a position
|
|
*/
|
|
ABOVE = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Place the content widget below a position
|
|
*/
|
|
BELOW = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A position for rendering content widgets.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IContentWidgetPosition {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Desired position which serves as an anchor for placing the content widget.
|
|
* The widget will be placed above, at, or below the specified position, based on the
|
|
* provided preference. The widget will always touch this position.
|
|
*
|
|
* Given sufficient horizontal space, the widget will be placed to the right of the
|
|
* passed in position. This can be tweaked by providing a `secondaryPosition`.
|
|
*
|
|
* @see preference
|
|
* @see secondaryPosition
|
|
*/
|
|
position: IPosition | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Optionally, a secondary position can be provided to further define the placing of
|
|
* the content widget. The secondary position must have the same line number as the
|
|
* primary position. If possible, the widget will be placed such that it also touches
|
|
* the secondary position.
|
|
*/
|
|
secondaryPosition?: IPosition | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Placement preference for position, in order of preference.
|
|
*/
|
|
preference: ContentWidgetPositionPreference[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Placement preference when multiple view positions refer to the same (model) position.
|
|
* This plays a role when injected text is involved.
|
|
*/
|
|
positionAffinity?: PositionAffinity;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A content widget renders inline with the text and can be easily placed 'near' an editor position.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IContentWidget {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Render this content widget in a location where it could overflow the editor's view dom node.
|
|
*/
|
|
allowEditorOverflow?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Call preventDefault() on mousedown events that target the content widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
suppressMouseDown?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a unique identifier of the content widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
getId(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the dom node of the content widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDomNode(): HTMLElement;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the placement of the content widget.
|
|
* If null is returned, the content widget will be placed off screen.
|
|
*/
|
|
getPosition(): IContentWidgetPosition | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Optional function that is invoked before rendering
|
|
* the content widget. If a dimension is returned the editor will
|
|
* attempt to use it.
|
|
*/
|
|
beforeRender?(): IDimension | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Optional function that is invoked after rendering the content
|
|
* widget. Is being invoked with the selected position preference
|
|
* or `null` if not rendered.
|
|
*/
|
|
afterRender?(position: ContentWidgetPositionPreference | null): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A positioning preference for rendering overlay widgets.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum OverlayWidgetPositionPreference {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Position the overlay widget in the top right corner
|
|
*/
|
|
TOP_RIGHT_CORNER = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Position the overlay widget in the bottom right corner
|
|
*/
|
|
BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Position the overlay widget in the top center
|
|
*/
|
|
TOP_CENTER = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A position for rendering overlay widgets.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IOverlayWidgetPosition {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The position preference for the overlay widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
preference: OverlayWidgetPositionPreference | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An overlay widgets renders on top of the text.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IOverlayWidget {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a unique identifier of the overlay widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
getId(): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the dom node of the overlay widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDomNode(): HTMLElement;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the placement of the overlay widget.
|
|
* If null is returned, the overlay widget is responsible to place itself.
|
|
*/
|
|
getPosition(): IOverlayWidgetPosition | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Type of hit element with the mouse in the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum MouseTargetType {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of an unknown element.
|
|
*/
|
|
UNKNOWN = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of the textarea used for input.
|
|
*/
|
|
TEXTAREA = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of the glyph margin
|
|
*/
|
|
GUTTER_GLYPH_MARGIN = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of the line numbers
|
|
*/
|
|
GUTTER_LINE_NUMBERS = 3,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of the line decorations
|
|
*/
|
|
GUTTER_LINE_DECORATIONS = 4,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of the whitespace left in the gutter by a view zone.
|
|
*/
|
|
GUTTER_VIEW_ZONE = 5,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of text in the content.
|
|
*/
|
|
CONTENT_TEXT = 6,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of empty space in the content (e.g. after line text or below last line)
|
|
*/
|
|
CONTENT_EMPTY = 7,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of a view zone in the content.
|
|
*/
|
|
CONTENT_VIEW_ZONE = 8,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of a content widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
CONTENT_WIDGET = 9,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of the decorations overview ruler.
|
|
*/
|
|
OVERVIEW_RULER = 10,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of a scrollbar.
|
|
*/
|
|
SCROLLBAR = 11,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is on top of an overlay widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
OVERLAY_WIDGET = 12,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Mouse is outside of the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
OUTSIDE_EDITOR = 13
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The target element
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly element: Element | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The 'approximate' editor position
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly position: Position | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Desired mouse column (e.g. when position.column gets clamped to text length -- clicking after text on a line).
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly mouseColumn: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The 'approximate' editor range
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly range: Range | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetUnknown extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.UNKNOWN;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetTextarea extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.TEXTAREA;
|
|
readonly position: null;
|
|
readonly range: null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetMarginData {
|
|
readonly isAfterLines: boolean;
|
|
readonly glyphMarginLeft: number;
|
|
readonly glyphMarginWidth: number;
|
|
readonly lineNumbersWidth: number;
|
|
readonly offsetX: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetMargin extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.GUTTER_GLYPH_MARGIN | MouseTargetType.GUTTER_LINE_NUMBERS | MouseTargetType.GUTTER_LINE_DECORATIONS;
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
readonly detail: IMouseTargetMarginData;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetViewZoneData {
|
|
readonly viewZoneId: string;
|
|
readonly positionBefore: Position | null;
|
|
readonly positionAfter: Position | null;
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
readonly afterLineNumber: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetViewZone extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.GUTTER_VIEW_ZONE | MouseTargetType.CONTENT_VIEW_ZONE;
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
readonly detail: IMouseTargetViewZoneData;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetContentTextData {
|
|
readonly mightBeForeignElement: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetContentText extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.CONTENT_TEXT;
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
readonly detail: IMouseTargetContentTextData;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetContentEmptyData {
|
|
readonly isAfterLines: boolean;
|
|
readonly horizontalDistanceToText?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetContentEmpty extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.CONTENT_EMPTY;
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
readonly detail: IMouseTargetContentEmptyData;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetContentWidget extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.CONTENT_WIDGET;
|
|
readonly position: null;
|
|
readonly range: null;
|
|
readonly detail: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetOverlayWidget extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.OVERLAY_WIDGET;
|
|
readonly position: null;
|
|
readonly range: null;
|
|
readonly detail: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetScrollbar extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.SCROLLBAR;
|
|
readonly position: Position;
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetOverviewRuler extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.OVERVIEW_RULER;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMouseTargetOutsideEditor extends IBaseMouseTarget {
|
|
readonly type: MouseTargetType.OUTSIDE_EDITOR;
|
|
readonly outsidePosition: 'above' | 'below' | 'left' | 'right';
|
|
readonly outsideDistance: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Target hit with the mouse in the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export type IMouseTarget = (IMouseTargetUnknown | IMouseTargetTextarea | IMouseTargetMargin | IMouseTargetViewZone | IMouseTargetContentText | IMouseTargetContentEmpty | IMouseTargetContentWidget | IMouseTargetOverlayWidget | IMouseTargetScrollbar | IMouseTargetOverviewRuler | IMouseTargetOutsideEditor);
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A mouse event originating from the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEditorMouseEvent {
|
|
readonly event: IMouseEvent;
|
|
readonly target: IMouseTarget;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IPartialEditorMouseEvent {
|
|
readonly event: IMouseEvent;
|
|
readonly target: IMouseTarget | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A paste event originating from the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IPasteEvent {
|
|
readonly range: Range;
|
|
readonly languageId: string | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IDiffEditorConstructionOptions extends IDiffEditorOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial editor dimension (to avoid measuring the container).
|
|
*/
|
|
dimension?: IDimension;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Place overflow widgets inside an external DOM node.
|
|
* Defaults to an internal DOM node.
|
|
*/
|
|
overflowWidgetsDomNode?: HTMLElement;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Aria label for original editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
originalAriaLabel?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Aria label for modified editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
modifiedAriaLabel?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Is the diff editor inside another editor
|
|
* Defaults to false
|
|
*/
|
|
isInEmbeddedEditor?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A rich code editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ICodeEditor extends IEditor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the content of the current model has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModelContent: IEvent<IModelContentChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the language of the current model has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModelLanguage: IEvent<IModelLanguageChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the language configuration of the current model has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModelLanguageConfiguration: IEvent<IModelLanguageConfigurationChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the options of the current model has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModelOptions: IEvent<IModelOptionsChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the configuration of the editor has changed. (e.g. `editor.updateOptions()`)
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeConfiguration: IEvent<ConfigurationChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the cursor position has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeCursorPosition: IEvent<ICursorPositionChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the cursor selection has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeCursorSelection: IEvent<ICursorSelectionChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the model of this editor has changed (e.g. `editor.setModel()`).
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModel: IEvent<IModelChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the decorations of the current model have changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModelDecorations: IEvent<IModelDecorationsChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the text inside this editor gained focus (i.e. cursor starts blinking).
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidFocusEditorText: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the text inside this editor lost focus (i.e. cursor stops blinking).
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidBlurEditorText: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the text inside this editor or an editor widget gained focus.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidFocusEditorWidget: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the text inside this editor or an editor widget lost focus.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidBlurEditorWidget: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted after composition has started.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidCompositionStart: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted after composition has ended.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidCompositionEnd: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when editing failed because the editor is read-only.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidAttemptReadOnlyEdit: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when users paste text in the editor.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidPaste: IEvent<IPasteEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "mouseup".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onMouseUp: IEvent<IEditorMouseEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "mousedown".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onMouseDown: IEvent<IEditorMouseEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "contextmenu".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onContextMenu: IEvent<IEditorMouseEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "mousemove".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onMouseMove: IEvent<IEditorMouseEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "mouseleave".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onMouseLeave: IEvent<IPartialEditorMouseEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "keyup".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onKeyUp: IEvent<IKeyboardEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted on a "keydown".
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onKeyDown: IEvent<IKeyboardEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the layout of the editor has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidLayoutChange: IEvent<EditorLayoutInfo>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the content width or content height in the editor has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidContentSizeChange: IEvent<IContentSizeChangedEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the scroll in the editor has changed.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidScrollChange: IEvent<IScrollEvent>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when hidden areas change in the editor (e.g. due to folding).
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeHiddenAreas: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Saves current view state of the editor in a serializable object.
|
|
*/
|
|
saveViewState(): ICodeEditorViewState | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Restores the view state of the editor from a serializable object generated by `saveViewState`.
|
|
*/
|
|
restoreViewState(state: ICodeEditorViewState | null): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns true if the text inside this editor or an editor widget has focus.
|
|
*/
|
|
hasWidgetFocus(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get a contribution of this editor.
|
|
* @id Unique identifier of the contribution.
|
|
* @return The contribution or null if contribution not found.
|
|
*/
|
|
getContribution<T extends IEditorContribution>(id: string): T | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Type the getModel() of IEditor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getModel(): ITextModel | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Sets the current model attached to this editor.
|
|
* If the previous model was created by the editor via the value key in the options
|
|
* literal object, it will be destroyed. Otherwise, if the previous model was set
|
|
* via setModel, or the model key in the options literal object, the previous model
|
|
* will not be destroyed.
|
|
* It is safe to call setModel(null) to simply detach the current model from the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
setModel(model: ITextModel | null): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets all the editor computed options.
|
|
*/
|
|
getOptions(): IComputedEditorOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Gets a specific editor option.
|
|
*/
|
|
getOption<T extends EditorOption>(id: T): FindComputedEditorOptionValueById<T>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the editor's configuration (without any validation or defaults).
|
|
*/
|
|
getRawOptions(): IEditorOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get value of the current model attached to this editor.
|
|
* @see {@link ITextModel.getValue}
|
|
*/
|
|
getValue(options?: {
|
|
preserveBOM: boolean;
|
|
lineEnding: string;
|
|
}): string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the value of the current model attached to this editor.
|
|
* @see {@link ITextModel.setValue}
|
|
*/
|
|
setValue(newValue: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the width of the editor's content.
|
|
* This is information that is "erased" when computing `scrollWidth = Math.max(contentWidth, width)`
|
|
*/
|
|
getContentWidth(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the scrollWidth of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
getScrollWidth(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the scrollLeft of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
getScrollLeft(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the height of the editor's content.
|
|
* This is information that is "erased" when computing `scrollHeight = Math.max(contentHeight, height)`
|
|
*/
|
|
getContentHeight(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the scrollHeight of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
getScrollHeight(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the scrollTop of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
getScrollTop(): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the scrollLeft of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
setScrollLeft(newScrollLeft: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the scrollTop of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
setScrollTop(newScrollTop: number, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the scroll position of the editor's viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
setScrollPosition(position: INewScrollPosition, scrollType?: ScrollType): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Check if the editor is currently scrolling towards a different scroll position.
|
|
*/
|
|
hasPendingScrollAnimation(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get an action that is a contribution to this editor.
|
|
* @id Unique identifier of the contribution.
|
|
* @return The action or null if action not found.
|
|
*/
|
|
getAction(id: string): IEditorAction | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Execute a command on the editor.
|
|
* The edits will land on the undo-redo stack, but no "undo stop" will be pushed.
|
|
* @param source The source of the call.
|
|
* @param command The command to execute
|
|
*/
|
|
executeCommand(source: string | null | undefined, command: ICommand): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Create an "undo stop" in the undo-redo stack.
|
|
*/
|
|
pushUndoStop(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove the "undo stop" in the undo-redo stack.
|
|
*/
|
|
popUndoStop(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Execute edits on the editor.
|
|
* The edits will land on the undo-redo stack, but no "undo stop" will be pushed.
|
|
* @param source The source of the call.
|
|
* @param edits The edits to execute.
|
|
* @param endCursorState Cursor state after the edits were applied.
|
|
*/
|
|
executeEdits(source: string | null | undefined, edits: IIdentifiedSingleEditOperation[], endCursorState?: ICursorStateComputer | Selection[]): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Execute multiple (concomitant) commands on the editor.
|
|
* @param source The source of the call.
|
|
* @param command The commands to execute
|
|
*/
|
|
executeCommands(source: string | null | undefined, commands: (ICommand | null)[]): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all the decorations on a line (filtering out decorations from other editors).
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineDecorations(lineNumber: number): IModelDecoration[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all the decorations for a range (filtering out decorations from other editors).
|
|
*/
|
|
getDecorationsInRange(range: Range): IModelDecoration[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* All decorations added through this call will get the ownerId of this editor.
|
|
* @deprecated Use `createDecorationsCollection`
|
|
* @see createDecorationsCollection
|
|
*/
|
|
deltaDecorations(oldDecorations: string[], newDecorations: IModelDeltaDecoration[]): string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove previously added decorations.
|
|
*/
|
|
removeDecorations(decorationIds: string[]): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the layout info for the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLayoutInfo(): EditorLayoutInfo;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the ranges that are currently visible.
|
|
* Does not account for horizontal scrolling.
|
|
*/
|
|
getVisibleRanges(): Range[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the vertical position (top offset) for the line's top w.r.t. to the first line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getTopForLineNumber(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the vertical position (top offset) for the line's bottom w.r.t. to the first line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getBottomForLineNumber(lineNumber: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the vertical position (top offset) for the position w.r.t. to the first line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getTopForPosition(lineNumber: number, column: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Write the screen reader content to be the current selection
|
|
*/
|
|
writeScreenReaderContent(reason: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the editor's container dom node
|
|
*/
|
|
getContainerDomNode(): HTMLElement;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns the editor's dom node
|
|
*/
|
|
getDomNode(): HTMLElement | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add a content widget. Widgets must have unique ids, otherwise they will be overwritten.
|
|
*/
|
|
addContentWidget(widget: IContentWidget): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Layout/Reposition a content widget. This is a ping to the editor to call widget.getPosition()
|
|
* and update appropriately.
|
|
*/
|
|
layoutContentWidget(widget: IContentWidget): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove a content widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
removeContentWidget(widget: IContentWidget): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add an overlay widget. Widgets must have unique ids, otherwise they will be overwritten.
|
|
*/
|
|
addOverlayWidget(widget: IOverlayWidget): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Layout/Reposition an overlay widget. This is a ping to the editor to call widget.getPosition()
|
|
* and update appropriately.
|
|
*/
|
|
layoutOverlayWidget(widget: IOverlayWidget): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove an overlay widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
removeOverlayWidget(widget: IOverlayWidget): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the view zones. View zones are lost when a new model is attached to the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
changeViewZones(callback: (accessor: IViewZoneChangeAccessor) => void): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the horizontal position (left offset) for the column w.r.t to the beginning of the line.
|
|
* This method works only if the line `lineNumber` is currently rendered (in the editor's viewport).
|
|
* Use this method with caution.
|
|
*/
|
|
getOffsetForColumn(lineNumber: number, column: number): number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Force an editor render now.
|
|
*/
|
|
render(forceRedraw?: boolean): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the hit test target at coordinates `clientX` and `clientY`.
|
|
* The coordinates are relative to the top-left of the viewport.
|
|
*
|
|
* @returns Hit test target or null if the coordinates fall outside the editor or the editor has no model.
|
|
*/
|
|
getTargetAtClientPoint(clientX: number, clientY: number): IMouseTarget | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the visible position for `position`.
|
|
* The result position takes scrolling into account and is relative to the top left corner of the editor.
|
|
* Explanation 1: the results of this method will change for the same `position` if the user scrolls the editor.
|
|
* Explanation 2: the results of this method will not change if the container of the editor gets repositioned.
|
|
* Warning: the results of this method are inaccurate for positions that are outside the current editor viewport.
|
|
*/
|
|
getScrolledVisiblePosition(position: IPosition): {
|
|
top: number;
|
|
left: number;
|
|
height: number;
|
|
} | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Apply the same font settings as the editor to `target`.
|
|
*/
|
|
applyFontInfo(target: HTMLElement): void;
|
|
setBanner(bannerDomNode: HTMLElement | null, height: number): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Information about a line in the diff editor
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDiffLineInformation {
|
|
readonly equivalentLineNumber: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A rich diff editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDiffEditor extends IEditor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* @see {@link ICodeEditor.getContainerDomNode}
|
|
*/
|
|
getContainerDomNode(): HTMLElement;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the diff information computed by this diff editor has been updated.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidUpdateDiff: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when the diff model is changed (i.e. the diff editor shows new content).
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChangeModel: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Saves current view state of the editor in a serializable object.
|
|
*/
|
|
saveViewState(): IDiffEditorViewState | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Restores the view state of the editor from a serializable object generated by `saveViewState`.
|
|
*/
|
|
restoreViewState(state: IDiffEditorViewState | null): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Type the getModel() of IEditor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getModel(): IDiffEditorModel | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Sets the current model attached to this editor.
|
|
* If the previous model was created by the editor via the value key in the options
|
|
* literal object, it will be destroyed. Otherwise, if the previous model was set
|
|
* via setModel, or the model key in the options literal object, the previous model
|
|
* will not be destroyed.
|
|
* It is safe to call setModel(null) to simply detach the current model from the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
setModel(model: IDiffEditorModel | null): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the `original` editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getOriginalEditor(): ICodeEditor;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the `modified` editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
getModifiedEditor(): ICodeEditor;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the computed diff information.
|
|
*/
|
|
getLineChanges(): ILineChange[] | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get information based on computed diff about a line number from the original model.
|
|
* If the diff computation is not finished or the model is missing, will return null.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDiffLineInformationForOriginal(lineNumber: number): IDiffLineInformation | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get information based on computed diff about a line number from the modified model.
|
|
* If the diff computation is not finished or the model is missing, will return null.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDiffLineInformationForModified(lineNumber: number): IDiffLineInformation | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Update the editor's options after the editor has been created.
|
|
*/
|
|
updateOptions(newOptions: IDiffEditorOptions): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class FontInfo extends BareFontInfo {
|
|
readonly _editorStylingBrand: void;
|
|
readonly version: number;
|
|
readonly isTrusted: boolean;
|
|
readonly isMonospace: boolean;
|
|
readonly typicalHalfwidthCharacterWidth: number;
|
|
readonly typicalFullwidthCharacterWidth: number;
|
|
readonly canUseHalfwidthRightwardsArrow: boolean;
|
|
readonly spaceWidth: number;
|
|
readonly middotWidth: number;
|
|
readonly wsmiddotWidth: number;
|
|
readonly maxDigitWidth: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class BareFontInfo {
|
|
readonly _bareFontInfoBrand: void;
|
|
readonly pixelRatio: number;
|
|
readonly fontFamily: string;
|
|
readonly fontWeight: string;
|
|
readonly fontSize: number;
|
|
readonly fontFeatureSettings: string;
|
|
readonly fontVariationSettings: string;
|
|
readonly lineHeight: number;
|
|
readonly letterSpacing: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export const EditorZoom: IEditorZoom;
|
|
|
|
export interface IEditorZoom {
|
|
onDidChangeZoomLevel: IEvent<number>;
|
|
getZoomLevel(): number;
|
|
setZoomLevel(zoomLevel: number): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//compatibility:
|
|
export type IReadOnlyModel = ITextModel;
|
|
export type IModel = ITextModel;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.languages {
|
|
|
|
export interface IRelativePattern {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A base file path to which this pattern will be matched against relatively.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly base: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A file glob pattern like `*.{ts,js}` that will be matched on file paths
|
|
* relative to the base path.
|
|
*
|
|
* Example: Given a base of `/home/work/folder` and a file path of `/home/work/folder/index.js`,
|
|
* the file glob pattern will match on `index.js`.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly pattern: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type LanguageSelector = string | LanguageFilter | ReadonlyArray<string | LanguageFilter>;
|
|
|
|
export interface LanguageFilter {
|
|
readonly language?: string;
|
|
readonly scheme?: string;
|
|
readonly pattern?: string | IRelativePattern;
|
|
readonly notebookType?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* This provider is implemented in the UI thread.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly hasAccessToAllModels?: boolean;
|
|
readonly exclusive?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* This provider comes from a builtin extension.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly isBuiltin?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register information about a new language.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function register(language: ILanguageExtensionPoint): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the information of all the registered languages.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function getLanguages(): ILanguageExtensionPoint[];
|
|
|
|
export function getEncodedLanguageId(languageId: string): number;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when a language is associated for the first time with a text model.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onLanguage(languageId: string, callback: () => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An event emitted when a language is associated for the first time with a text model or
|
|
* whena language is encountered during the tokenization of another language.
|
|
* @event
|
|
*/
|
|
export function onLanguageEncountered(languageId: string, callback: () => void): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the editing configuration for a language.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setLanguageConfiguration(languageId: string, configuration: LanguageConfiguration): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A token.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IToken {
|
|
startIndex: number;
|
|
scopes: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The result of a line tokenization.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ILineTokens {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The list of tokens on the line.
|
|
*/
|
|
tokens: IToken[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The tokenization end state.
|
|
* A pointer will be held to this and the object should not be modified by the tokenizer after the pointer is returned.
|
|
*/
|
|
endState: IState;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The result of a line tokenization.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IEncodedLineTokens {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The tokens on the line in a binary, encoded format. Each token occupies two array indices. For token i:
|
|
* - at offset 2*i => startIndex
|
|
* - at offset 2*i + 1 => metadata
|
|
* Meta data is in binary format:
|
|
* - -------------------------------------------
|
|
* 3322 2222 2222 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000
|
|
* 1098 7654 3210 9876 5432 1098 7654 3210
|
|
* - -------------------------------------------
|
|
* bbbb bbbb bfff ffff ffFF FFTT LLLL LLLL
|
|
* - -------------------------------------------
|
|
* - L = EncodedLanguageId (8 bits): Use `getEncodedLanguageId` to get the encoded ID of a language.
|
|
* - T = StandardTokenType (2 bits): Other = 0, Comment = 1, String = 2, RegEx = 3.
|
|
* - F = FontStyle (4 bits): None = 0, Italic = 1, Bold = 2, Underline = 4, Strikethrough = 8.
|
|
* - f = foreground ColorId (9 bits)
|
|
* - b = background ColorId (9 bits)
|
|
* - The color value for each colorId is defined in IStandaloneThemeData.customTokenColors:
|
|
* e.g. colorId = 1 is stored in IStandaloneThemeData.customTokenColors[1]. Color id = 0 means no color,
|
|
* id = 1 is for the default foreground color, id = 2 for the default background.
|
|
*/
|
|
tokens: Uint32Array;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The tokenization end state.
|
|
* A pointer will be held to this and the object should not be modified by the tokenizer after the pointer is returned.
|
|
*/
|
|
endState: IState;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A factory for token providers.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface TokensProviderFactory {
|
|
create(): ProviderResult<TokensProvider | EncodedTokensProvider | IMonarchLanguage>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A "manual" provider of tokens.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface TokensProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial state of a language. Will be the state passed in to tokenize the first line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getInitialState(): IState;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Tokenize a line given the state at the beginning of the line.
|
|
*/
|
|
tokenize(line: string, state: IState): ILineTokens;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A "manual" provider of tokens, returning tokens in a binary form.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface EncodedTokensProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The initial state of a language. Will be the state passed in to tokenize the first line.
|
|
*/
|
|
getInitialState(): IState;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Tokenize a line given the state at the beginning of the line.
|
|
*/
|
|
tokenizeEncoded(line: string, state: IState): IEncodedLineTokens;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Tokenize a line given the state at the beginning of the line.
|
|
*/
|
|
tokenize?(line: string, state: IState): ILineTokens;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Change the color map that is used for token colors.
|
|
* Supported formats (hex): #RRGGBB, $RRGGBBAA, #RGB, #RGBA
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setColorMap(colorMap: string[] | null): void;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a tokens provider factory for a language. This tokenizer will be exclusive with a tokenizer
|
|
* set using `setTokensProvider` or one created using `setMonarchTokensProvider`, but will work together
|
|
* with a tokens provider set using `registerDocumentSemanticTokensProvider` or `registerDocumentRangeSemanticTokensProvider`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerTokensProviderFactory(languageId: string, factory: TokensProviderFactory): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the tokens provider for a language (manual implementation). This tokenizer will be exclusive
|
|
* with a tokenizer created using `setMonarchTokensProvider`, or with `registerTokensProviderFactory`,
|
|
* but will work together with a tokens provider set using `registerDocumentSemanticTokensProvider`
|
|
* or `registerDocumentRangeSemanticTokensProvider`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setTokensProvider(languageId: string, provider: TokensProvider | EncodedTokensProvider | Thenable<TokensProvider | EncodedTokensProvider>): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the tokens provider for a language (monarch implementation). This tokenizer will be exclusive
|
|
* with a tokenizer set using `setTokensProvider`, or with `registerTokensProviderFactory`, but will
|
|
* work together with a tokens provider set using `registerDocumentSemanticTokensProvider` or
|
|
* `registerDocumentRangeSemanticTokensProvider`.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function setMonarchTokensProvider(languageId: string, languageDef: IMonarchLanguage | Thenable<IMonarchLanguage>): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a reference provider (used by e.g. reference search).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerReferenceProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: ReferenceProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a rename provider (used by e.g. rename symbol).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerRenameProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: RenameProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a signature help provider (used by e.g. parameter hints).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerSignatureHelpProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: SignatureHelpProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a hover provider (used by e.g. editor hover).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerHoverProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: HoverProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a document symbol provider (used by e.g. outline).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDocumentSymbolProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentSymbolProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a document highlight provider (used by e.g. highlight occurrences).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDocumentHighlightProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentHighlightProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register an linked editing range provider.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerLinkedEditingRangeProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: LinkedEditingRangeProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a definition provider (used by e.g. go to definition).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDefinitionProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DefinitionProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a implementation provider (used by e.g. go to implementation).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerImplementationProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: ImplementationProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a type definition provider (used by e.g. go to type definition).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerTypeDefinitionProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: TypeDefinitionProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a code lens provider (used by e.g. inline code lenses).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerCodeLensProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: CodeLensProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a code action provider (used by e.g. quick fix).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerCodeActionProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: CodeActionProvider, metadata?: CodeActionProviderMetadata): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a formatter that can handle only entire models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDocumentFormattingEditProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentFormattingEditProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a formatter that can handle a range inside a model.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDocumentRangeFormattingEditProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentRangeFormattingEditProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a formatter than can do formatting as the user types.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerOnTypeFormattingEditProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: OnTypeFormattingEditProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a link provider that can find links in text.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerLinkProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: LinkProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a completion item provider (use by e.g. suggestions).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerCompletionItemProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: CompletionItemProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a document color provider (used by Color Picker, Color Decorator).
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerColorProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentColorProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a folding range provider
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerFoldingRangeProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: FoldingRangeProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a declaration provider
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDeclarationProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DeclarationProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a selection range provider
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerSelectionRangeProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: SelectionRangeProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a document semantic tokens provider. A semantic tokens provider will complement and enhance a
|
|
* simple top-down tokenizer. Simple top-down tokenizers can be set either via `setMonarchTokensProvider`
|
|
* or `setTokensProvider`.
|
|
*
|
|
* For the best user experience, register both a semantic tokens provider and a top-down tokenizer.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDocumentSemanticTokensProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentSemanticTokensProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register a document range semantic tokens provider. A semantic tokens provider will complement and enhance a
|
|
* simple top-down tokenizer. Simple top-down tokenizers can be set either via `setMonarchTokensProvider`
|
|
* or `setTokensProvider`.
|
|
*
|
|
* For the best user experience, register both a semantic tokens provider and a top-down tokenizer.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerDocumentRangeSemanticTokensProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: DocumentRangeSemanticTokensProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register an inline completions provider.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerInlineCompletionsProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: InlineCompletionsProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Register an inlay hints provider.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerInlayHintsProvider(languageSelector: LanguageSelector, provider: InlayHintsProvider): IDisposable;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Contains additional diagnostic information about the context in which
|
|
* a [code action](#CodeActionProvider.provideCodeActions) is run.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CodeActionContext {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An array of diagnostics.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly markers: editor.IMarkerData[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Requested kind of actions to return.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly only?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The reason why code actions were requested.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly trigger: CodeActionTriggerType;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The code action interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [light bulb](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/editingevolved#_code-action) feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CodeActionProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide commands for the given document and range.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideCodeActions(model: editor.ITextModel, range: Range, context: CodeActionContext, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<CodeActionList>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Given a code action fill in the edit. Will only invoked when missing.
|
|
*/
|
|
resolveCodeAction?(codeAction: CodeAction, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<CodeAction>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Metadata about the type of code actions that a {@link CodeActionProvider} provides.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CodeActionProviderMetadata {
|
|
/**
|
|
* List of code action kinds that a {@link CodeActionProvider} may return.
|
|
*
|
|
* This list is used to determine if a given `CodeActionProvider` should be invoked or not.
|
|
* To avoid unnecessary computation, every `CodeActionProvider` should list use `providedCodeActionKinds`. The
|
|
* list of kinds may either be generic, such as `["quickfix", "refactor", "source"]`, or list out every kind provided,
|
|
* such as `["quickfix.removeLine", "source.fixAll" ...]`.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly providedCodeActionKinds?: readonly string[];
|
|
readonly documentation?: ReadonlyArray<{
|
|
readonly kind: string;
|
|
readonly command: Command;
|
|
}>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes how comments for a language work.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CommentRule {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The line comment token, like `// this is a comment`
|
|
*/
|
|
lineComment?: string | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The block comment character pair, like `/* block comment */`
|
|
*/
|
|
blockComment?: CharacterPair | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language configuration interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* various editor features, like automatic bracket insertion, automatic indentation etc.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface LanguageConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's comment settings.
|
|
*/
|
|
comments?: CommentRule;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's brackets.
|
|
* This configuration implicitly affects pressing Enter around these brackets.
|
|
*/
|
|
brackets?: CharacterPair[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's word definition.
|
|
* If the language supports Unicode identifiers (e.g. JavaScript), it is preferable
|
|
* to provide a word definition that uses exclusion of known separators.
|
|
* e.g.: A regex that matches anything except known separators (and dot is allowed to occur in a floating point number):
|
|
* /(-?\d*\.\d\w*)|([^\`\~\!\@\#\%\^\&\*\(\)\-\=\+\[\{\]\}\\\|\;\:\'\"\,\.\<\>\/\?\s]+)/g
|
|
*/
|
|
wordPattern?: RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's indentation settings.
|
|
*/
|
|
indentationRules?: IndentationRule;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's rules to be evaluated when pressing Enter.
|
|
*/
|
|
onEnterRules?: OnEnterRule[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's auto closing pairs. The 'close' character is automatically inserted with the
|
|
* 'open' character is typed. If not set, the configured brackets will be used.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoClosingPairs?: IAutoClosingPairConditional[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's surrounding pairs. When the 'open' character is typed on a selection, the
|
|
* selected string is surrounded by the open and close characters. If not set, the autoclosing pairs
|
|
* settings will be used.
|
|
*/
|
|
surroundingPairs?: IAutoClosingPair[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines a list of bracket pairs that are colorized depending on their nesting level.
|
|
* If not set, the configured brackets will be used.
|
|
*/
|
|
colorizedBracketPairs?: CharacterPair[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines what characters must be after the cursor for bracket or quote autoclosing to occur when using the \'languageDefined\' autoclosing setting.
|
|
*
|
|
* This is typically the set of characters which can not start an expression, such as whitespace, closing brackets, non-unary operators, etc.
|
|
*/
|
|
autoCloseBefore?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The language's folding rules.
|
|
*/
|
|
folding?: FoldingRules;
|
|
/**
|
|
* **Deprecated** Do not use.
|
|
*
|
|
* @deprecated Will be replaced by a better API soon.
|
|
*/
|
|
__electricCharacterSupport?: {
|
|
docComment?: IDocComment;
|
|
};
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes indentation rules for a language.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IndentationRule {
|
|
/**
|
|
* If a line matches this pattern, then all the lines after it should be unindented once (until another rule matches).
|
|
*/
|
|
decreaseIndentPattern: RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If a line matches this pattern, then all the lines after it should be indented once (until another rule matches).
|
|
*/
|
|
increaseIndentPattern: RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If a line matches this pattern, then **only the next line** after it should be indented once.
|
|
*/
|
|
indentNextLinePattern?: RegExp | null;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If a line matches this pattern, then its indentation should not be changed and it should not be evaluated against the other rules.
|
|
*/
|
|
unIndentedLinePattern?: RegExp | null;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes language specific folding markers such as '#region' and '#endregion'.
|
|
* The start and end regexes will be tested against the contents of all lines and must be designed efficiently:
|
|
* - the regex should start with '^'
|
|
* - regexp flags (i, g) are ignored
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface FoldingMarkers {
|
|
start: RegExp;
|
|
end: RegExp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes folding rules for a language.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface FoldingRules {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Used by the indentation based strategy to decide whether empty lines belong to the previous or the next block.
|
|
* A language adheres to the off-side rule if blocks in that language are expressed by their indentation.
|
|
* See [wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Off-side_rule) for more information.
|
|
* If not set, `false` is used and empty lines belong to the previous block.
|
|
*/
|
|
offSide?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Region markers used by the language.
|
|
*/
|
|
markers?: FoldingMarkers;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes a rule to be evaluated when pressing Enter.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface OnEnterRule {
|
|
/**
|
|
* This rule will only execute if the text before the cursor matches this regular expression.
|
|
*/
|
|
beforeText: RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* This rule will only execute if the text after the cursor matches this regular expression.
|
|
*/
|
|
afterText?: RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* This rule will only execute if the text above the this line matches this regular expression.
|
|
*/
|
|
previousLineText?: RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The action to execute.
|
|
*/
|
|
action: EnterAction;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Definition of documentation comments (e.g. Javadoc/JSdoc)
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IDocComment {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The string that starts a doc comment (e.g. '/**')
|
|
*/
|
|
open: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The string that appears on the last line and closes the doc comment (e.g. ' * /').
|
|
*/
|
|
close?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A tuple of two characters, like a pair of
|
|
* opening and closing brackets.
|
|
*/
|
|
export type CharacterPair = [string, string];
|
|
|
|
export interface IAutoClosingPair {
|
|
open: string;
|
|
close: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IAutoClosingPairConditional extends IAutoClosingPair {
|
|
notIn?: string[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes what to do with the indentation when pressing Enter.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum IndentAction {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Insert new line and copy the previous line's indentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Insert new line and indent once (relative to the previous line's indentation).
|
|
*/
|
|
Indent = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Insert two new lines:
|
|
* - the first one indented which will hold the cursor
|
|
* - the second one at the same indentation level
|
|
*/
|
|
IndentOutdent = 2,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Insert new line and outdent once (relative to the previous line's indentation).
|
|
*/
|
|
Outdent = 3
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes what to do when pressing Enter.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface EnterAction {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describe what to do with the indentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
indentAction: IndentAction;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes text to be appended after the new line and after the indentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
appendText?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes the number of characters to remove from the new line's indentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
removeText?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The state of the tokenizer between two lines.
|
|
* It is useful to store flags such as in multiline comment, etc.
|
|
* The model will clone the previous line's state and pass it in to tokenize the next line.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IState {
|
|
clone(): IState;
|
|
equals(other: IState): boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A provider result represents the values a provider, like the {@link HoverProvider},
|
|
* may return. For once this is the actual result type `T`, like `Hover`, or a thenable that resolves
|
|
* to that type `T`. In addition, `null` and `undefined` can be returned - either directly or from a
|
|
* thenable.
|
|
*/
|
|
export type ProviderResult<T> = T | undefined | null | Thenable<T | undefined | null>;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A hover represents additional information for a symbol or word. Hovers are
|
|
* rendered in a tooltip-like widget.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface Hover {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The contents of this hover.
|
|
*/
|
|
contents: IMarkdownString[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range to which this hover applies. When missing, the
|
|
* editor will use the range at the current position or the
|
|
* current position itself.
|
|
*/
|
|
range?: IRange;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The hover provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [hover](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/intellisense)-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface HoverProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide a hover for the given position and document. Multiple hovers at the same
|
|
* position will be merged by the editor. A hover can have a range which defaults
|
|
* to the word range at the position when omitted.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideHover(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<Hover>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum CompletionItemKind {
|
|
Method = 0,
|
|
Function = 1,
|
|
Constructor = 2,
|
|
Field = 3,
|
|
Variable = 4,
|
|
Class = 5,
|
|
Struct = 6,
|
|
Interface = 7,
|
|
Module = 8,
|
|
Property = 9,
|
|
Event = 10,
|
|
Operator = 11,
|
|
Unit = 12,
|
|
Value = 13,
|
|
Constant = 14,
|
|
Enum = 15,
|
|
EnumMember = 16,
|
|
Keyword = 17,
|
|
Text = 18,
|
|
Color = 19,
|
|
File = 20,
|
|
Reference = 21,
|
|
Customcolor = 22,
|
|
Folder = 23,
|
|
TypeParameter = 24,
|
|
User = 25,
|
|
Issue = 26,
|
|
Snippet = 27
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CompletionItemLabel {
|
|
label: string;
|
|
detail?: string;
|
|
description?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum CompletionItemTag {
|
|
Deprecated = 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum CompletionItemInsertTextRule {
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Adjust whitespace/indentation of multiline insert texts to
|
|
* match the current line indentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
KeepWhitespace = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* `insertText` is a snippet.
|
|
*/
|
|
InsertAsSnippet = 4
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CompletionItemRanges {
|
|
insert: IRange;
|
|
replace: IRange;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A completion item represents a text snippet that is
|
|
* proposed to complete text that is being typed.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CompletionItem {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The label of this completion item. By default
|
|
* this is also the text that is inserted when selecting
|
|
* this completion.
|
|
*/
|
|
label: string | CompletionItemLabel;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The kind of this completion item. Based on the kind
|
|
* an icon is chosen by the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
kind: CompletionItemKind;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A modifier to the `kind` which affect how the item
|
|
* is rendered, e.g. Deprecated is rendered with a strikeout
|
|
*/
|
|
tags?: ReadonlyArray<CompletionItemTag>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A human-readable string with additional information
|
|
* about this item, like type or symbol information.
|
|
*/
|
|
detail?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A human-readable string that represents a doc-comment.
|
|
*/
|
|
documentation?: string | IMarkdownString;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A string that should be used when comparing this item
|
|
* with other items. When `falsy` the {@link CompletionItem.label label}
|
|
* is used.
|
|
*/
|
|
sortText?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A string that should be used when filtering a set of
|
|
* completion items. When `falsy` the {@link CompletionItem.label label}
|
|
* is used.
|
|
*/
|
|
filterText?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Select this item when showing. *Note* that only one completion item can be selected and
|
|
* that the editor decides which item that is. The rule is that the *first* item of those
|
|
* that match best is selected.
|
|
*/
|
|
preselect?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A string or snippet that should be inserted in a document when selecting
|
|
* this completion.
|
|
*/
|
|
insertText: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Additional rules (as bitmask) that should be applied when inserting
|
|
* this completion.
|
|
*/
|
|
insertTextRules?: CompletionItemInsertTextRule;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A range of text that should be replaced by this completion item.
|
|
*
|
|
* Defaults to a range from the start of the {@link TextDocument.getWordRangeAtPosition current word} to the
|
|
* current position.
|
|
*
|
|
* *Note:* The range must be a {@link Range.isSingleLine single line} and it must
|
|
* {@link Range.contains contain} the position at which completion has been {@link CompletionItemProvider.provideCompletionItems requested}.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange | CompletionItemRanges;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional set of characters that when pressed while this completion is active will accept it first and
|
|
* then type that character. *Note* that all commit characters should have `length=1` and that superfluous
|
|
* characters will be ignored.
|
|
*/
|
|
commitCharacters?: string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional array of additional text edits that are applied when
|
|
* selecting this completion. Edits must not overlap with the main edit
|
|
* nor with themselves.
|
|
*/
|
|
additionalTextEdits?: editor.ISingleEditOperation[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* A command that should be run upon acceptance of this item.
|
|
*/
|
|
command?: Command;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CompletionList {
|
|
suggestions: CompletionItem[];
|
|
incomplete?: boolean;
|
|
dispose?(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* How a suggest provider was triggered.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum CompletionTriggerKind {
|
|
Invoke = 0,
|
|
TriggerCharacter = 1,
|
|
TriggerForIncompleteCompletions = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Contains additional information about the context in which
|
|
* {@link CompletionItemProvider.provideCompletionItems completion provider} is triggered.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CompletionContext {
|
|
/**
|
|
* How the completion was triggered.
|
|
*/
|
|
triggerKind: CompletionTriggerKind;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Character that triggered the completion item provider.
|
|
*
|
|
* `undefined` if provider was not triggered by a character.
|
|
*/
|
|
triggerCharacter?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The completion item provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [IntelliSense](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/intellisense).
|
|
*
|
|
* When computing *complete* completion items is expensive, providers can optionally implement
|
|
* the `resolveCompletionItem`-function. In that case it is enough to return completion
|
|
* items with a {@link CompletionItem.label label} from the
|
|
* {@link CompletionItemProvider.provideCompletionItems provideCompletionItems}-function. Subsequently,
|
|
* when a completion item is shown in the UI and gains focus this provider is asked to resolve
|
|
* the item, like adding {@link CompletionItem.documentation doc-comment} or {@link CompletionItem.detail details}.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CompletionItemProvider {
|
|
triggerCharacters?: string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide completion items for the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideCompletionItems(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, context: CompletionContext, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<CompletionList>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Given a completion item fill in more data, like {@link CompletionItem.documentation doc-comment}
|
|
* or {@link CompletionItem.detail details}.
|
|
*
|
|
* The editor will only resolve a completion item once.
|
|
*/
|
|
resolveCompletionItem?(item: CompletionItem, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<CompletionItem>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* How an {@link InlineCompletionsProvider inline completion provider} was triggered.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum InlineCompletionTriggerKind {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Completion was triggered automatically while editing.
|
|
* It is sufficient to return a single completion item in this case.
|
|
*/
|
|
Automatic = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Completion was triggered explicitly by a user gesture.
|
|
* Return multiple completion items to enable cycling through them.
|
|
*/
|
|
Explicit = 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlineCompletionContext {
|
|
/**
|
|
* How the completion was triggered.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly triggerKind: InlineCompletionTriggerKind;
|
|
readonly selectedSuggestionInfo: SelectedSuggestionInfo | undefined;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class SelectedSuggestionInfo {
|
|
readonly range: IRange;
|
|
readonly text: string;
|
|
readonly completionKind: CompletionItemKind;
|
|
readonly isSnippetText: boolean;
|
|
constructor(range: IRange, text: string, completionKind: CompletionItemKind, isSnippetText: boolean);
|
|
equals(other: SelectedSuggestionInfo): boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlineCompletion {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The text to insert.
|
|
* If the text contains a line break, the range must end at the end of a line.
|
|
* If existing text should be replaced, the existing text must be a prefix of the text to insert.
|
|
*
|
|
* The text can also be a snippet. In that case, a preview with default parameters is shown.
|
|
* When accepting the suggestion, the full snippet is inserted.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly insertText: string | {
|
|
snippet: string;
|
|
};
|
|
/**
|
|
* A text that is used to decide if this inline completion should be shown.
|
|
* An inline completion is shown if the text to replace is a subword of the filter text.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly filterText?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional array of additional text edits that are applied when
|
|
* selecting this completion. Edits must not overlap with the main edit
|
|
* nor with themselves.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly additionalTextEdits?: editor.ISingleEditOperation[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range to replace.
|
|
* Must begin and end on the same line.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly range?: IRange;
|
|
readonly command?: Command;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set to `true`, unopened closing brackets are removed and unclosed opening brackets are closed.
|
|
* Defaults to `false`.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly completeBracketPairs?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlineCompletions<TItem extends InlineCompletion = InlineCompletion> {
|
|
readonly items: readonly TItem[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* A list of commands associated with the inline completions of this list.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly commands?: Command[];
|
|
readonly suppressSuggestions?: boolean | undefined;
|
|
/**
|
|
* When set and the user types a suggestion without derivating from it, the inline suggestion is not updated.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly enableForwardStability?: boolean | undefined;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlineCompletionsProvider<T extends InlineCompletions = InlineCompletions> {
|
|
provideInlineCompletions(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, context: InlineCompletionContext, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<T>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Will be called when an item is shown.
|
|
* @param updatedInsertText Is useful to understand bracket completion.
|
|
*/
|
|
handleItemDidShow?(completions: T, item: T['items'][number], updatedInsertText: string): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Will be called when an item is partially accepted.
|
|
*/
|
|
handlePartialAccept?(completions: T, item: T['items'][number], acceptedCharacters: number): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Will be called when a completions list is no longer in use and can be garbage-collected.
|
|
*/
|
|
freeInlineCompletions(completions: T): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CodeAction {
|
|
title: string;
|
|
command?: Command;
|
|
edit?: WorkspaceEdit;
|
|
diagnostics?: editor.IMarkerData[];
|
|
kind?: string;
|
|
isPreferred?: boolean;
|
|
disabled?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum CodeActionTriggerType {
|
|
Invoke = 1,
|
|
Auto = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CodeActionList extends IDisposable {
|
|
readonly actions: ReadonlyArray<CodeAction>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Represents a parameter of a callable-signature. A parameter can
|
|
* have a label and a doc-comment.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ParameterInformation {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The label of this signature. Will be shown in
|
|
* the UI.
|
|
*/
|
|
label: string | [number, number];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The human-readable doc-comment of this signature. Will be shown
|
|
* in the UI but can be omitted.
|
|
*/
|
|
documentation?: string | IMarkdownString;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Represents the signature of something callable. A signature
|
|
* can have a label, like a function-name, a doc-comment, and
|
|
* a set of parameters.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface SignatureInformation {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The label of this signature. Will be shown in
|
|
* the UI.
|
|
*/
|
|
label: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The human-readable doc-comment of this signature. Will be shown
|
|
* in the UI but can be omitted.
|
|
*/
|
|
documentation?: string | IMarkdownString;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The parameters of this signature.
|
|
*/
|
|
parameters: ParameterInformation[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Index of the active parameter.
|
|
*
|
|
* If provided, this is used in place of `SignatureHelp.activeSignature`.
|
|
*/
|
|
activeParameter?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Signature help represents the signature of something
|
|
* callable. There can be multiple signatures but only one
|
|
* active and only one active parameter.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface SignatureHelp {
|
|
/**
|
|
* One or more signatures.
|
|
*/
|
|
signatures: SignatureInformation[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The active signature.
|
|
*/
|
|
activeSignature: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The active parameter of the active signature.
|
|
*/
|
|
activeParameter: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SignatureHelpResult extends IDisposable {
|
|
value: SignatureHelp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum SignatureHelpTriggerKind {
|
|
Invoke = 1,
|
|
TriggerCharacter = 2,
|
|
ContentChange = 3
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SignatureHelpContext {
|
|
readonly triggerKind: SignatureHelpTriggerKind;
|
|
readonly triggerCharacter?: string;
|
|
readonly isRetrigger: boolean;
|
|
readonly activeSignatureHelp?: SignatureHelp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The signature help provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [parameter hints](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/intellisense)-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface SignatureHelpProvider {
|
|
readonly signatureHelpTriggerCharacters?: ReadonlyArray<string>;
|
|
readonly signatureHelpRetriggerCharacters?: ReadonlyArray<string>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide help for the signature at the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideSignatureHelp(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken, context: SignatureHelpContext): ProviderResult<SignatureHelpResult>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A document highlight kind.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum DocumentHighlightKind {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A textual occurrence.
|
|
*/
|
|
Text = 0,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Read-access of a symbol, like reading a variable.
|
|
*/
|
|
Read = 1,
|
|
/**
|
|
* Write-access of a symbol, like writing to a variable.
|
|
*/
|
|
Write = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A document highlight is a range inside a text document which deserves
|
|
* special attention. Usually a document highlight is visualized by changing
|
|
* the background color of its range.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DocumentHighlight {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range this highlight applies to.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The highlight kind, default is {@link DocumentHighlightKind.Text text}.
|
|
*/
|
|
kind?: DocumentHighlightKind;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The document highlight provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the word-highlight-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DocumentHighlightProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide a set of document highlights, like all occurrences of a variable or
|
|
* all exit-points of a function.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDocumentHighlights(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<DocumentHighlight[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The linked editing range provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the linked editing feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface LinkedEditingRangeProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide a list of ranges that can be edited together.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideLinkedEditingRanges(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<LinkedEditingRanges>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Represents a list of ranges that can be edited together along with a word pattern to describe valid contents.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface LinkedEditingRanges {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A list of ranges that can be edited together. The ranges must have
|
|
* identical length and text content. The ranges cannot overlap
|
|
*/
|
|
ranges: IRange[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional word pattern that describes valid contents for the given ranges.
|
|
* If no pattern is provided, the language configuration's word pattern will be used.
|
|
*/
|
|
wordPattern?: RegExp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Value-object that contains additional information when
|
|
* requesting references.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ReferenceContext {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Include the declaration of the current symbol.
|
|
*/
|
|
includeDeclaration: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The reference provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [find references](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/editingevolved#_peek)-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ReferenceProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide a set of project-wide references for the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideReferences(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, context: ReferenceContext, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<Location[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Represents a location inside a resource, such as a line
|
|
* inside a text file.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface Location {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The resource identifier of this location.
|
|
*/
|
|
uri: Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The document range of this locations.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface LocationLink {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A range to select where this link originates from.
|
|
*/
|
|
originSelectionRange?: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The target uri this link points to.
|
|
*/
|
|
uri: Uri;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The full range this link points to.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A range to select this link points to. Must be contained
|
|
* in `LocationLink.range`.
|
|
*/
|
|
targetSelectionRange?: IRange;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type Definition = Location | Location[] | LocationLink[];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The definition provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [go to definition](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/editingevolved#_go-to-definition)
|
|
* and peek definition features.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DefinitionProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide the definition of the symbol at the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDefinition(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<Definition | LocationLink[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The definition provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [go to definition](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/editingevolved#_go-to-definition)
|
|
* and peek definition features.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DeclarationProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide the declaration of the symbol at the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDeclaration(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<Definition | LocationLink[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The implementation provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the go to implementation feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ImplementationProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide the implementation of the symbol at the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideImplementation(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<Definition | LocationLink[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The type definition provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the go to type definition feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface TypeDefinitionProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide the type definition of the symbol at the given position and document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideTypeDefinition(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<Definition | LocationLink[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A symbol kind.
|
|
*/
|
|
export enum SymbolKind {
|
|
File = 0,
|
|
Module = 1,
|
|
Namespace = 2,
|
|
Package = 3,
|
|
Class = 4,
|
|
Method = 5,
|
|
Property = 6,
|
|
Field = 7,
|
|
Constructor = 8,
|
|
Enum = 9,
|
|
Interface = 10,
|
|
Function = 11,
|
|
Variable = 12,
|
|
Constant = 13,
|
|
String = 14,
|
|
Number = 15,
|
|
Boolean = 16,
|
|
Array = 17,
|
|
Object = 18,
|
|
Key = 19,
|
|
Null = 20,
|
|
EnumMember = 21,
|
|
Struct = 22,
|
|
Event = 23,
|
|
Operator = 24,
|
|
TypeParameter = 25
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum SymbolTag {
|
|
Deprecated = 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface DocumentSymbol {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
detail: string;
|
|
kind: SymbolKind;
|
|
tags: ReadonlyArray<SymbolTag>;
|
|
containerName?: string;
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
selectionRange: IRange;
|
|
children?: DocumentSymbol[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The document symbol provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the [go to symbol](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/editor/editingevolved#_go-to-symbol)-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DocumentSymbolProvider {
|
|
displayName?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide symbol information for the given document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDocumentSymbols(model: editor.ITextModel, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<DocumentSymbol[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface TextEdit {
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
text: string;
|
|
eol?: editor.EndOfLineSequence;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Interface used to format a model
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface FormattingOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Size of a tab in spaces.
|
|
*/
|
|
tabSize: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Prefer spaces over tabs.
|
|
*/
|
|
insertSpaces: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The list of multiple ranges to format at once, if the provider supports it.
|
|
*/
|
|
ranges?: Range[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The document formatting provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the formatting-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DocumentFormattingEditProvider {
|
|
readonly displayName?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide formatting edits for a whole document.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDocumentFormattingEdits(model: editor.ITextModel, options: FormattingOptions, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<TextEdit[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The document formatting provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the formatting-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DocumentRangeFormattingEditProvider {
|
|
readonly displayName?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide formatting edits for a range in a document.
|
|
*
|
|
* The given range is a hint and providers can decide to format a smaller
|
|
* or larger range. Often this is done by adjusting the start and end
|
|
* of the range to full syntax nodes.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDocumentRangeFormattingEdits(model: editor.ITextModel, range: Range, options: FormattingOptions, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<TextEdit[]>;
|
|
provideDocumentRangesFormattingEdits?(model: editor.ITextModel, ranges: Range[], options: FormattingOptions, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<TextEdit[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* The document formatting provider interface defines the contract between extensions and
|
|
* the formatting-feature.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface OnTypeFormattingEditProvider {
|
|
autoFormatTriggerCharacters: string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide formatting edits after a character has been typed.
|
|
*
|
|
* The given position and character should hint to the provider
|
|
* what range the position to expand to, like find the matching `{`
|
|
* when `}` has been entered.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideOnTypeFormattingEdits(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, ch: string, options: FormattingOptions, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<TextEdit[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A link inside the editor.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface ILink {
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
url?: Uri | string;
|
|
tooltip?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface ILinksList {
|
|
links: ILink[];
|
|
dispose?(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A provider of links.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface LinkProvider {
|
|
provideLinks(model: editor.ITextModel, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<ILinksList>;
|
|
resolveLink?: (link: ILink, token: CancellationToken) => ProviderResult<ILink>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A color in RGBA format.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IColor {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The red component in the range [0-1].
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly red: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The green component in the range [0-1].
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly green: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The blue component in the range [0-1].
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly blue: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The alpha component in the range [0-1].
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly alpha: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* String representations for a color
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IColorPresentation {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The label of this color presentation. It will be shown on the color
|
|
* picker header. By default this is also the text that is inserted when selecting
|
|
* this color presentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
label: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An {@link TextEdit edit} which is applied to a document when selecting
|
|
* this presentation for the color.
|
|
*/
|
|
textEdit?: TextEdit;
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional array of additional {@link TextEdit text edits} that are applied when
|
|
* selecting this color presentation.
|
|
*/
|
|
additionalTextEdits?: TextEdit[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A color range is a range in a text model which represents a color.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IColorInformation {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The range within the model.
|
|
*/
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The color represented in this range.
|
|
*/
|
|
color: IColor;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A provider of colors for editor models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface DocumentColorProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provides the color ranges for a specific model.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideDocumentColors(model: editor.ITextModel, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<IColorInformation[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide the string representations for a color.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideColorPresentations(model: editor.ITextModel, colorInfo: IColorInformation, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<IColorPresentation[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SelectionRange {
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SelectionRangeProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provide ranges that should be selected from the given position.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideSelectionRanges(model: editor.ITextModel, positions: Position[], token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<SelectionRange[][]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface FoldingContext {
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A provider of folding ranges for editor models.
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface FoldingRangeProvider {
|
|
/**
|
|
* An optional event to signal that the folding ranges from this provider have changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
onDidChange?: IEvent<this>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provides the folding ranges for a specific model.
|
|
*/
|
|
provideFoldingRanges(model: editor.ITextModel, context: FoldingContext, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<FoldingRange[]>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface FoldingRange {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The one-based start line of the range to fold. The folded area starts after the line's last character.
|
|
*/
|
|
start: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The one-based end line of the range to fold. The folded area ends with the line's last character.
|
|
*/
|
|
end: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Describes the {@link FoldingRangeKind Kind} of the folding range such as {@link FoldingRangeKind.Comment Comment} or
|
|
* {@link FoldingRangeKind.Region Region}. The kind is used to categorize folding ranges and used by commands
|
|
* like 'Fold all comments'. See
|
|
* {@link FoldingRangeKind} for an enumeration of standardized kinds.
|
|
*/
|
|
kind?: FoldingRangeKind;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export class FoldingRangeKind {
|
|
value: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Kind for folding range representing a comment. The value of the kind is 'comment'.
|
|
*/
|
|
static readonly Comment: FoldingRangeKind;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Kind for folding range representing a import. The value of the kind is 'imports'.
|
|
*/
|
|
static readonly Imports: FoldingRangeKind;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Kind for folding range representing regions (for example marked by `#region`, `#endregion`).
|
|
* The value of the kind is 'region'.
|
|
*/
|
|
static readonly Region: FoldingRangeKind;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Returns a {@link FoldingRangeKind} for the given value.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param value of the kind.
|
|
*/
|
|
static fromValue(value: string): FoldingRangeKind;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Creates a new {@link FoldingRangeKind}.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param value of the kind.
|
|
*/
|
|
constructor(value: string);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface WorkspaceEditMetadata {
|
|
needsConfirmation: boolean;
|
|
label: string;
|
|
description?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface WorkspaceFileEditOptions {
|
|
overwrite?: boolean;
|
|
ignoreIfNotExists?: boolean;
|
|
ignoreIfExists?: boolean;
|
|
recursive?: boolean;
|
|
copy?: boolean;
|
|
folder?: boolean;
|
|
skipTrashBin?: boolean;
|
|
maxSize?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IWorkspaceFileEdit {
|
|
oldResource?: Uri;
|
|
newResource?: Uri;
|
|
options?: WorkspaceFileEditOptions;
|
|
metadata?: WorkspaceEditMetadata;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IWorkspaceTextEdit {
|
|
resource: Uri;
|
|
textEdit: TextEdit & {
|
|
insertAsSnippet?: boolean;
|
|
};
|
|
versionId: number | undefined;
|
|
metadata?: WorkspaceEditMetadata;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface WorkspaceEdit {
|
|
edits: Array<IWorkspaceTextEdit | IWorkspaceFileEdit>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface Rejection {
|
|
rejectReason?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface RenameLocation {
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
text: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface RenameProvider {
|
|
provideRenameEdits(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, newName: string, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<WorkspaceEdit & Rejection>;
|
|
resolveRenameLocation?(model: editor.ITextModel, position: Position, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<RenameLocation & Rejection>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface Command {
|
|
id: string;
|
|
title: string;
|
|
tooltip?: string;
|
|
arguments?: any[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CodeLens {
|
|
range: IRange;
|
|
id?: string;
|
|
command?: Command;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CodeLensList {
|
|
lenses: CodeLens[];
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface CodeLensProvider {
|
|
onDidChange?: IEvent<this>;
|
|
provideCodeLenses(model: editor.ITextModel, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<CodeLensList>;
|
|
resolveCodeLens?(model: editor.ITextModel, codeLens: CodeLens, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<CodeLens>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export enum InlayHintKind {
|
|
Type = 1,
|
|
Parameter = 2
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlayHintLabelPart {
|
|
label: string;
|
|
tooltip?: string | IMarkdownString;
|
|
command?: Command;
|
|
location?: Location;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlayHint {
|
|
label: string | InlayHintLabelPart[];
|
|
tooltip?: string | IMarkdownString;
|
|
textEdits?: TextEdit[];
|
|
position: IPosition;
|
|
kind?: InlayHintKind;
|
|
paddingLeft?: boolean;
|
|
paddingRight?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlayHintList {
|
|
hints: InlayHint[];
|
|
dispose(): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface InlayHintsProvider {
|
|
displayName?: string;
|
|
onDidChangeInlayHints?: IEvent<void>;
|
|
provideInlayHints(model: editor.ITextModel, range: Range, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<InlayHintList>;
|
|
resolveInlayHint?(hint: InlayHint, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<InlayHint>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SemanticTokensLegend {
|
|
readonly tokenTypes: string[];
|
|
readonly tokenModifiers: string[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SemanticTokens {
|
|
readonly resultId?: string;
|
|
readonly data: Uint32Array;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SemanticTokensEdit {
|
|
readonly start: number;
|
|
readonly deleteCount: number;
|
|
readonly data?: Uint32Array;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface SemanticTokensEdits {
|
|
readonly resultId?: string;
|
|
readonly edits: SemanticTokensEdit[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface DocumentSemanticTokensProvider {
|
|
onDidChange?: IEvent<void>;
|
|
getLegend(): SemanticTokensLegend;
|
|
provideDocumentSemanticTokens(model: editor.ITextModel, lastResultId: string | null, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<SemanticTokens | SemanticTokensEdits>;
|
|
releaseDocumentSemanticTokens(resultId: string | undefined): void;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface DocumentRangeSemanticTokensProvider {
|
|
getLegend(): SemanticTokensLegend;
|
|
provideDocumentRangeSemanticTokens(model: editor.ITextModel, range: Range, token: CancellationToken): ProviderResult<SemanticTokens>;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface ILanguageExtensionPoint {
|
|
id: string;
|
|
extensions?: string[];
|
|
filenames?: string[];
|
|
filenamePatterns?: string[];
|
|
firstLine?: string;
|
|
aliases?: string[];
|
|
mimetypes?: string[];
|
|
configuration?: Uri;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* A Monarch language definition
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IMonarchLanguage {
|
|
/**
|
|
* map from string to ILanguageRule[]
|
|
*/
|
|
tokenizer: {
|
|
[name: string]: IMonarchLanguageRule[];
|
|
};
|
|
/**
|
|
* is the language case insensitive?
|
|
*/
|
|
ignoreCase?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* is the language unicode-aware? (i.e., /\u{1D306}/)
|
|
*/
|
|
unicode?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* if no match in the tokenizer assign this token class (default 'source')
|
|
*/
|
|
defaultToken?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* for example [['{','}','delimiter.curly']]
|
|
*/
|
|
brackets?: IMonarchLanguageBracket[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* start symbol in the tokenizer (by default the first entry is used)
|
|
*/
|
|
start?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* attach this to every token class (by default '.' + name)
|
|
*/
|
|
tokenPostfix?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* include line feeds (in the form of a \n character) at the end of lines
|
|
* Defaults to false
|
|
*/
|
|
includeLF?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Other keys that can be referred to by the tokenizer.
|
|
*/
|
|
[key: string]: any;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* A rule is either a regular expression and an action
|
|
* shorthands: [reg,act] == { regex: reg, action: act}
|
|
* and : [reg,act,nxt] == { regex: reg, action: act{ next: nxt }}
|
|
*/
|
|
export type IShortMonarchLanguageRule1 = [string | RegExp, IMonarchLanguageAction];
|
|
|
|
export type IShortMonarchLanguageRule2 = [string | RegExp, IMonarchLanguageAction, string];
|
|
|
|
export interface IExpandedMonarchLanguageRule {
|
|
/**
|
|
* match tokens
|
|
*/
|
|
regex?: string | RegExp;
|
|
/**
|
|
* action to take on match
|
|
*/
|
|
action?: IMonarchLanguageAction;
|
|
/**
|
|
* or an include rule. include all rules from the included state
|
|
*/
|
|
include?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type IMonarchLanguageRule = IShortMonarchLanguageRule1 | IShortMonarchLanguageRule2 | IExpandedMonarchLanguageRule;
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* An action is either an array of actions...
|
|
* ... or a case statement with guards...
|
|
* ... or a basic action with a token value.
|
|
*/
|
|
export type IShortMonarchLanguageAction = string;
|
|
|
|
export interface IExpandedMonarchLanguageAction {
|
|
/**
|
|
* array of actions for each parenthesized match group
|
|
*/
|
|
group?: IMonarchLanguageAction[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* map from string to ILanguageAction
|
|
*/
|
|
cases?: Object;
|
|
/**
|
|
* token class (ie. css class) (or "@brackets" or "@rematch")
|
|
*/
|
|
token?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* the next state to push, or "@push", "@pop", "@popall"
|
|
*/
|
|
next?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* switch to this state
|
|
*/
|
|
switchTo?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* go back n characters in the stream
|
|
*/
|
|
goBack?: number;
|
|
/**
|
|
* @open or @close
|
|
*/
|
|
bracket?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* switch to embedded language (using the mimetype) or get out using "@pop"
|
|
*/
|
|
nextEmbedded?: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* log a message to the browser console window
|
|
*/
|
|
log?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export type IMonarchLanguageAction = IShortMonarchLanguageAction | IExpandedMonarchLanguageAction | (IShortMonarchLanguageAction | IExpandedMonarchLanguageAction)[];
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* This interface can be shortened as an array, ie. ['{','}','delimiter.curly']
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface IMonarchLanguageBracket {
|
|
/**
|
|
* open bracket
|
|
*/
|
|
open: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* closing bracket
|
|
*/
|
|
close: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* token class
|
|
*/
|
|
token: string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.worker {
|
|
|
|
|
|
export interface IMirrorTextModel {
|
|
readonly version: number;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IMirrorModel extends IMirrorTextModel {
|
|
readonly uri: Uri;
|
|
readonly version: number;
|
|
getValue(): string;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
export interface IWorkerContext<H = undefined> {
|
|
/**
|
|
* A proxy to the main thread host object.
|
|
*/
|
|
host: H;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get all available mirror models in this worker.
|
|
*/
|
|
getMirrorModels(): IMirrorModel[];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//dtsv=3
|
|
|
|
/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
* Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
|
|
* Licensed under the MIT License. See License.txt in the project root for license information.
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.languages.css {
|
|
export interface CSSFormatConfiguration {
|
|
/** separate selectors with newline (e.g. "a,\nbr" or "a, br"): Default: true */
|
|
newlineBetweenSelectors?: boolean;
|
|
/** add a new line after every css rule: Default: true */
|
|
newlineBetweenRules?: boolean;
|
|
/** ensure space around selector separators: '>', '+', '~' (e.g. "a>b" -> "a > b"): Default: false */
|
|
spaceAroundSelectorSeparator?: boolean;
|
|
/** put braces on the same line as rules (`collapse`), or put braces on own line, Allman / ANSI style (`expand`). Default `collapse` */
|
|
braceStyle?: 'collapse' | 'expand';
|
|
/** whether existing line breaks before elements should be preserved. Default: true */
|
|
preserveNewLines?: boolean;
|
|
/** maximum number of line breaks to be preserved in one chunk. Default: unlimited */
|
|
maxPreserveNewLines?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface Options {
|
|
readonly validate?: boolean;
|
|
readonly lint?: {
|
|
readonly compatibleVendorPrefixes?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly vendorPrefix?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly duplicateProperties?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly emptyRules?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly importStatement?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly boxModel?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly universalSelector?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly zeroUnits?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly fontFaceProperties?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly hexColorLength?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly argumentsInColorFunction?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly unknownProperties?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly ieHack?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly unknownVendorSpecificProperties?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly propertyIgnoredDueToDisplay?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly important?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly float?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
readonly idSelector?: 'ignore' | 'warning' | 'error';
|
|
};
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures the CSS data types known by the langauge service.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly data?: CSSDataConfiguration;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Settings for the CSS formatter.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly format?: CSSFormatConfiguration;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface ModeConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in completionItemProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly completionItems?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in hoverProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly hovers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentSymbolProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentSymbols?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in definitions provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly definitions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in references provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly references?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in references provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentHighlights?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in rename provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly rename?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in color provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly colors?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in foldingRange provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly foldingRanges?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in diagnostic provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly diagnostics?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in selection range provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionRanges?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in document formatting edit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in document formatting range edit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentRangeFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface LanguageServiceDefaults {
|
|
readonly languageId: string;
|
|
readonly onDidChange: IEvent<LanguageServiceDefaults>;
|
|
readonly modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration;
|
|
readonly options: Options;
|
|
setOptions(options: Options): void;
|
|
setModeConfiguration(modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration): void;
|
|
/** @deprecated Use options instead */
|
|
readonly diagnosticsOptions: DiagnosticsOptions;
|
|
/** @deprecated Use setOptions instead */
|
|
setDiagnosticsOptions(options: DiagnosticsOptions): void;
|
|
}
|
|
/** @deprecated Use Options instead */
|
|
export type DiagnosticsOptions = Options;
|
|
export const cssDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export const scssDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export const lessDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export interface CSSDataConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the standard CSS properties, at-directives, pseudoClasses and pseudoElements are shown.
|
|
*/
|
|
useDefaultDataProvider?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provides a set of custom data providers.
|
|
*/
|
|
dataProviders?: {
|
|
[providerId: string]: CSSDataV1;
|
|
};
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Custom CSS properties, at-directives, pseudoClasses and pseudoElements
|
|
* https://github.com/microsoft/vscode-css-languageservice/blob/main/docs/customData.md
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface CSSDataV1 {
|
|
version: 1 | 1.1;
|
|
properties?: IPropertyData[];
|
|
atDirectives?: IAtDirectiveData[];
|
|
pseudoClasses?: IPseudoClassData[];
|
|
pseudoElements?: IPseudoElementData[];
|
|
}
|
|
export type EntryStatus = 'standard' | 'experimental' | 'nonstandard' | 'obsolete';
|
|
export interface IReference {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
url: string;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IPropertyData {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
browsers?: string[];
|
|
restrictions?: string[];
|
|
status?: EntryStatus;
|
|
syntax?: string;
|
|
values?: IValueData[];
|
|
references?: IReference[];
|
|
relevance?: number;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IAtDirectiveData {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
browsers?: string[];
|
|
status?: EntryStatus;
|
|
references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IPseudoClassData {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
browsers?: string[];
|
|
status?: EntryStatus;
|
|
references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IPseudoElementData {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
browsers?: string[];
|
|
status?: EntryStatus;
|
|
references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IValueData {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
browsers?: string[];
|
|
status?: EntryStatus;
|
|
references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface MarkupContent {
|
|
kind: MarkupKind;
|
|
value: string;
|
|
}
|
|
export type MarkupKind = 'plaintext' | 'markdown';
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
* Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
|
|
* Licensed under the MIT License. See License.txt in the project root for license information.
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.languages.html {
|
|
export interface HTMLFormatConfiguration {
|
|
readonly tabSize: number;
|
|
readonly insertSpaces: boolean;
|
|
readonly wrapLineLength: number;
|
|
readonly unformatted: string;
|
|
readonly contentUnformatted: string;
|
|
readonly indentInnerHtml: boolean;
|
|
readonly preserveNewLines: boolean;
|
|
readonly maxPreserveNewLines: number | undefined;
|
|
readonly indentHandlebars: boolean;
|
|
readonly endWithNewline: boolean;
|
|
readonly extraLiners: string;
|
|
readonly wrapAttributes: 'auto' | 'force' | 'force-aligned' | 'force-expand-multiline';
|
|
}
|
|
export interface CompletionConfiguration {
|
|
readonly [providerId: string]: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface Options {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Settings for the HTML formatter.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly format?: HTMLFormatConfiguration;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Code completion settings.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly suggest?: CompletionConfiguration;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configures the HTML data types known by the HTML langauge service.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly data?: HTMLDataConfiguration;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface ModeConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in completionItemProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly completionItems?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in hoverProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly hovers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentSymbolProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentSymbols?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in definitions provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly links?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in references provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentHighlights?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in rename provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly rename?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in color provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly colors?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in foldingRange provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly foldingRanges?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in diagnostic provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly diagnostics?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in selection range provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionRanges?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentFormattingEdit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentRangeFormattingEdit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentRangeFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface LanguageServiceDefaults {
|
|
readonly languageId: string;
|
|
readonly modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration;
|
|
readonly onDidChange: IEvent<LanguageServiceDefaults>;
|
|
readonly options: Options;
|
|
setOptions(options: Options): void;
|
|
setModeConfiguration(modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration): void;
|
|
}
|
|
export const htmlLanguageService: LanguageServiceRegistration;
|
|
export const htmlDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export const handlebarLanguageService: LanguageServiceRegistration;
|
|
export const handlebarDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export const razorLanguageService: LanguageServiceRegistration;
|
|
export const razorDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export interface LanguageServiceRegistration extends IDisposable {
|
|
readonly defaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Registers a new HTML language service for the languageId.
|
|
* Note: 'html', 'handlebar' and 'razor' are registered by default.
|
|
*
|
|
* Use this method to register additional language ids with a HTML service.
|
|
* The language server has to be registered before an editor model is opened.
|
|
*/
|
|
export function registerHTMLLanguageService(languageId: string, options?: Options, modeConfiguration?: ModeConfiguration): LanguageServiceRegistration;
|
|
export interface HTMLDataConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the standard HTML tags and attributes are shown
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly useDefaultDataProvider?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Provides a set of custom data providers.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly dataProviders?: {
|
|
[providerId: string]: HTMLDataV1;
|
|
};
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Custom HTML tags attributes and attribute values
|
|
* https://github.com/microsoft/vscode-html-languageservice/blob/main/docs/customData.md
|
|
*/
|
|
export interface HTMLDataV1 {
|
|
readonly version: 1 | 1.1;
|
|
readonly tags?: ITagData[];
|
|
readonly globalAttributes?: IAttributeData[];
|
|
readonly valueSets?: IValueSet[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IReference {
|
|
readonly name: string;
|
|
readonly url: string;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface ITagData {
|
|
readonly name: string;
|
|
readonly description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
readonly attributes: IAttributeData[];
|
|
readonly references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IAttributeData {
|
|
readonly name: string;
|
|
readonly description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
readonly valueSet?: string;
|
|
readonly values?: IValueData[];
|
|
readonly references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IValueData {
|
|
readonly name: string;
|
|
readonly description?: string | MarkupContent;
|
|
readonly references?: IReference[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IValueSet {
|
|
readonly name: string;
|
|
readonly values: IValueData[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface MarkupContent {
|
|
readonly kind: MarkupKind;
|
|
readonly value: string;
|
|
}
|
|
export type MarkupKind = 'plaintext' | 'markdown';
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
* Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
|
|
* Licensed under the MIT License. See License.txt in the project root for license information.
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.languages.json {
|
|
export interface DiagnosticsOptions {
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the validator will be enabled and perform syntax and schema based validation,
|
|
* unless `DiagnosticsOptions.schemaValidation` is set to `ignore`.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly validate?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, comments are tolerated. If set to false, syntax errors will be emitted for comments.
|
|
* `DiagnosticsOptions.allowComments` will override this setting.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly allowComments?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A list of known schemas and/or associations of schemas to file names.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly schemas?: {
|
|
/**
|
|
* The URI of the schema, which is also the identifier of the schema.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly uri: string;
|
|
/**
|
|
* A list of glob patterns that describe for which file URIs the JSON schema will be used.
|
|
* '*' and '**' wildcards are supported. Exclusion patterns start with '!'.
|
|
* For example '*.schema.json', 'package.json', '!foo*.schema.json', 'foo/**\/BADRESP.json'.
|
|
* A match succeeds when there is at least one pattern matching and last matching pattern does not start with '!'.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly fileMatch?: string[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* The schema for the given URI.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly schema?: any;
|
|
}[];
|
|
/**
|
|
* If set, the schema service would load schema content on-demand with 'fetch' if available
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly enableSchemaRequest?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The severity of problems from schema validation. If set to 'ignore', schema validation will be skipped. If not set, 'warning' is used.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly schemaValidation?: SeverityLevel;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The severity of problems that occurred when resolving and loading schemas. If set to 'ignore', schema resolving problems are not reported. If not set, 'warning' is used.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly schemaRequest?: SeverityLevel;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The severity of reported trailing commas. If not set, trailing commas will be reported as errors.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly trailingCommas?: SeverityLevel;
|
|
/**
|
|
* The severity of reported comments. If not set, 'DiagnosticsOptions.allowComments' defines whether comments are ignored or reported as errors.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly comments?: SeverityLevel;
|
|
}
|
|
export type SeverityLevel = 'error' | 'warning' | 'ignore';
|
|
export interface ModeConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentFormattingEdit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentRangeFormattingEdit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentRangeFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in completionItemProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly completionItems?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in hoverProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly hovers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentSymbolProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentSymbols?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in tokens provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly tokens?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in color provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly colors?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in foldingRange provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly foldingRanges?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in diagnostic provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly diagnostics?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in selection range provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly selectionRanges?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface LanguageServiceDefaults {
|
|
readonly languageId: string;
|
|
readonly onDidChange: IEvent<LanguageServiceDefaults>;
|
|
readonly diagnosticsOptions: DiagnosticsOptions;
|
|
readonly modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration;
|
|
setDiagnosticsOptions(options: DiagnosticsOptions): void;
|
|
setModeConfiguration(modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration): void;
|
|
}
|
|
export const jsonDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
* Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
|
|
* Licensed under the MIT License. See License.txt in the project root for license information.
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
|
|
|
|
declare namespace monaco.languages.typescript {
|
|
export enum ModuleKind {
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
CommonJS = 1,
|
|
AMD = 2,
|
|
UMD = 3,
|
|
System = 4,
|
|
ES2015 = 5,
|
|
ESNext = 99
|
|
}
|
|
export enum JsxEmit {
|
|
None = 0,
|
|
Preserve = 1,
|
|
React = 2,
|
|
ReactNative = 3,
|
|
ReactJSX = 4,
|
|
ReactJSXDev = 5
|
|
}
|
|
export enum NewLineKind {
|
|
CarriageReturnLineFeed = 0,
|
|
LineFeed = 1
|
|
}
|
|
export enum ScriptTarget {
|
|
ES3 = 0,
|
|
ES5 = 1,
|
|
ES2015 = 2,
|
|
ES2016 = 3,
|
|
ES2017 = 4,
|
|
ES2018 = 5,
|
|
ES2019 = 6,
|
|
ES2020 = 7,
|
|
ESNext = 99,
|
|
JSON = 100,
|
|
Latest = 99
|
|
}
|
|
export enum ModuleResolutionKind {
|
|
Classic = 1,
|
|
NodeJs = 2
|
|
}
|
|
interface MapLike<T> {
|
|
[index: string]: T;
|
|
}
|
|
type CompilerOptionsValue = string | number | boolean | (string | number)[] | string[] | MapLike<string[]> | null | undefined;
|
|
interface CompilerOptions {
|
|
allowJs?: boolean;
|
|
allowSyntheticDefaultImports?: boolean;
|
|
allowUmdGlobalAccess?: boolean;
|
|
allowUnreachableCode?: boolean;
|
|
allowUnusedLabels?: boolean;
|
|
alwaysStrict?: boolean;
|
|
baseUrl?: string;
|
|
charset?: string;
|
|
checkJs?: boolean;
|
|
declaration?: boolean;
|
|
declarationMap?: boolean;
|
|
emitDeclarationOnly?: boolean;
|
|
declarationDir?: string;
|
|
disableSizeLimit?: boolean;
|
|
disableSourceOfProjectReferenceRedirect?: boolean;
|
|
downlevelIteration?: boolean;
|
|
emitBOM?: boolean;
|
|
emitDecoratorMetadata?: boolean;
|
|
experimentalDecorators?: boolean;
|
|
forceConsistentCasingInFileNames?: boolean;
|
|
importHelpers?: boolean;
|
|
inlineSourceMap?: boolean;
|
|
inlineSources?: boolean;
|
|
isolatedModules?: boolean;
|
|
jsx?: JsxEmit;
|
|
keyofStringsOnly?: boolean;
|
|
lib?: string[];
|
|
locale?: string;
|
|
mapRoot?: string;
|
|
maxNodeModuleJsDepth?: number;
|
|
module?: ModuleKind;
|
|
moduleResolution?: ModuleResolutionKind;
|
|
newLine?: NewLineKind;
|
|
noEmit?: boolean;
|
|
noEmitHelpers?: boolean;
|
|
noEmitOnError?: boolean;
|
|
noErrorTruncation?: boolean;
|
|
noFallthroughCasesInSwitch?: boolean;
|
|
noImplicitAny?: boolean;
|
|
noImplicitReturns?: boolean;
|
|
noImplicitThis?: boolean;
|
|
noStrictGenericChecks?: boolean;
|
|
noUnusedLocals?: boolean;
|
|
noUnusedParameters?: boolean;
|
|
noImplicitUseStrict?: boolean;
|
|
noLib?: boolean;
|
|
noResolve?: boolean;
|
|
out?: string;
|
|
outDir?: string;
|
|
outFile?: string;
|
|
paths?: MapLike<string[]>;
|
|
preserveConstEnums?: boolean;
|
|
preserveSymlinks?: boolean;
|
|
project?: string;
|
|
reactNamespace?: string;
|
|
jsxFactory?: string;
|
|
composite?: boolean;
|
|
removeComments?: boolean;
|
|
rootDir?: string;
|
|
rootDirs?: string[];
|
|
skipLibCheck?: boolean;
|
|
skipDefaultLibCheck?: boolean;
|
|
sourceMap?: boolean;
|
|
sourceRoot?: string;
|
|
strict?: boolean;
|
|
strictFunctionTypes?: boolean;
|
|
strictBindCallApply?: boolean;
|
|
strictNullChecks?: boolean;
|
|
strictPropertyInitialization?: boolean;
|
|
stripInternal?: boolean;
|
|
suppressExcessPropertyErrors?: boolean;
|
|
suppressImplicitAnyIndexErrors?: boolean;
|
|
target?: ScriptTarget;
|
|
traceResolution?: boolean;
|
|
resolveJsonModule?: boolean;
|
|
types?: string[];
|
|
/** Paths used to compute primary types search locations */
|
|
typeRoots?: string[];
|
|
esModuleInterop?: boolean;
|
|
useDefineForClassFields?: boolean;
|
|
[option: string]: CompilerOptionsValue | undefined;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface DiagnosticsOptions {
|
|
noSemanticValidation?: boolean;
|
|
noSyntaxValidation?: boolean;
|
|
noSuggestionDiagnostics?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Limit diagnostic computation to only visible files.
|
|
* Defaults to false.
|
|
*/
|
|
onlyVisible?: boolean;
|
|
diagnosticCodesToIgnore?: number[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface WorkerOptions {
|
|
/** A full HTTP path to a JavaScript file which adds a function `customTSWorkerFactory` to the self inside a web-worker */
|
|
customWorkerPath?: string;
|
|
}
|
|
interface InlayHintsOptions {
|
|
readonly includeInlayParameterNameHints?: 'none' | 'literals' | 'all';
|
|
readonly includeInlayParameterNameHintsWhenArgumentMatchesName?: boolean;
|
|
readonly includeInlayFunctionParameterTypeHints?: boolean;
|
|
readonly includeInlayVariableTypeHints?: boolean;
|
|
readonly includeInlayPropertyDeclarationTypeHints?: boolean;
|
|
readonly includeInlayFunctionLikeReturnTypeHints?: boolean;
|
|
readonly includeInlayEnumMemberValueHints?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
interface IExtraLib {
|
|
content: string;
|
|
version: number;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface IExtraLibs {
|
|
[path: string]: IExtraLib;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* A linked list of formatted diagnostic messages to be used as part of a multiline message.
|
|
* It is built from the bottom up, leaving the head to be the "main" diagnostic.
|
|
*/
|
|
interface DiagnosticMessageChain {
|
|
messageText: string;
|
|
/** Diagnostic category: warning = 0, error = 1, suggestion = 2, message = 3 */
|
|
category: 0 | 1 | 2 | 3;
|
|
code: number;
|
|
next?: DiagnosticMessageChain[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface Diagnostic extends DiagnosticRelatedInformation {
|
|
/** May store more in future. For now, this will simply be `true` to indicate when a diagnostic is an unused-identifier diagnostic. */
|
|
reportsUnnecessary?: {};
|
|
reportsDeprecated?: {};
|
|
source?: string;
|
|
relatedInformation?: DiagnosticRelatedInformation[];
|
|
}
|
|
export interface DiagnosticRelatedInformation {
|
|
/** Diagnostic category: warning = 0, error = 1, suggestion = 2, message = 3 */
|
|
category: 0 | 1 | 2 | 3;
|
|
code: number;
|
|
/** TypeScriptWorker removes all but the `fileName` property to avoid serializing circular JSON structures. */
|
|
file: {
|
|
fileName: string;
|
|
} | undefined;
|
|
start: number | undefined;
|
|
length: number | undefined;
|
|
messageText: string | DiagnosticMessageChain;
|
|
}
|
|
interface EmitOutput {
|
|
outputFiles: OutputFile[];
|
|
emitSkipped: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
interface OutputFile {
|
|
name: string;
|
|
writeByteOrderMark: boolean;
|
|
text: string;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface ModeConfiguration {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in completionItemProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly completionItems?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in hoverProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly hovers?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in documentSymbolProvider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentSymbols?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in definitions provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly definitions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in references provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly references?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in references provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentHighlights?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in rename provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly rename?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in diagnostic provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly diagnostics?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in document formatting range edit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly documentRangeFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in signature help provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly signatureHelp?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in onType formatting edit provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onTypeFormattingEdits?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in code actions provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly codeActions?: boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Defines whether the built-in inlay hints provider is enabled.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly inlayHints?: boolean;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface LanguageServiceDefaults {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Event fired when compiler options or diagnostics options are changed.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidChange: IEvent<void>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Event fired when extra libraries registered with the language service change.
|
|
*/
|
|
readonly onDidExtraLibsChange: IEvent<void>;
|
|
readonly workerOptions: WorkerOptions;
|
|
readonly inlayHintsOptions: InlayHintsOptions;
|
|
readonly modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration;
|
|
setModeConfiguration(modeConfiguration: ModeConfiguration): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the current extra libs registered with the language service.
|
|
*/
|
|
getExtraLibs(): IExtraLibs;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Add an additional source file to the language service. Use this
|
|
* for typescript (definition) files that won't be loaded as editor
|
|
* documents, like `jquery.d.ts`.
|
|
*
|
|
* @param content The file content
|
|
* @param filePath An optional file path
|
|
* @returns A disposable which will remove the file from the
|
|
* language service upon disposal.
|
|
*/
|
|
addExtraLib(content: string, filePath?: string): IDisposable;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Remove all existing extra libs and set the additional source
|
|
* files to the language service. Use this for typescript definition
|
|
* files that won't be loaded as editor documents, like `jquery.d.ts`.
|
|
* @param libs An array of entries to register.
|
|
*/
|
|
setExtraLibs(libs: {
|
|
content: string;
|
|
filePath?: string;
|
|
}[]): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get current TypeScript compiler options for the language service.
|
|
*/
|
|
getCompilerOptions(): CompilerOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set TypeScript compiler options.
|
|
*/
|
|
setCompilerOptions(options: CompilerOptions): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the current diagnostics options for the language service.
|
|
*/
|
|
getDiagnosticsOptions(): DiagnosticsOptions;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure whether syntactic and/or semantic validation should
|
|
* be performed
|
|
*/
|
|
setDiagnosticsOptions(options: DiagnosticsOptions): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure webworker options
|
|
*/
|
|
setWorkerOptions(options: WorkerOptions): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* No-op.
|
|
*/
|
|
setMaximumWorkerIdleTime(value: number): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure if all existing models should be eagerly sync'd
|
|
* to the worker on start or restart.
|
|
*/
|
|
setEagerModelSync(value: boolean): void;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the current setting for whether all existing models should be eagerly sync'd
|
|
* to the worker on start or restart.
|
|
*/
|
|
getEagerModelSync(): boolean;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Configure inlay hints options.
|
|
*/
|
|
setInlayHintsOptions(options: InlayHintsOptions): void;
|
|
}
|
|
export interface TypeScriptWorker {
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get diagnostic messages for any syntax issues in the given file.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSyntacticDiagnostics(fileName: string): Promise<Diagnostic[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get diagnostic messages for any semantic issues in the given file.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSemanticDiagnostics(fileName: string): Promise<Diagnostic[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get diagnostic messages for any suggestions related to the given file.
|
|
*/
|
|
getSuggestionDiagnostics(fileName: string): Promise<Diagnostic[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the content of a given file.
|
|
*/
|
|
getScriptText(fileName: string): Promise<string | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get diagnostic messages related to the current compiler options.
|
|
* @param fileName Not used
|
|
*/
|
|
getCompilerOptionsDiagnostics(fileName: string): Promise<Diagnostic[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get code completions for the given file and position.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.CompletionInfo | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getCompletionsAtPosition(fileName: string, position: number): Promise<any | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get code completion details for the given file, position, and entry.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.CompletionEntryDetails | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getCompletionEntryDetails(fileName: string, position: number, entry: string): Promise<any | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get signature help items for the item at the given file and position.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.SignatureHelpItems | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getSignatureHelpItems(fileName: string, position: number, options: any): Promise<any | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get quick info for the item at the given position in the file.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.QuickInfo | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getQuickInfoAtPosition(fileName: string, position: number): Promise<any | undefined>;
|
|
getDocumentHighlights(fileName: string, position: number, filesToSearch: string[]): Promise<ReadonlyArray<any> | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get the definition of the item at the given position in the file.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<ReadonlyArray<typescript.DefinitionInfo> | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getDefinitionAtPosition(fileName: string, position: number): Promise<ReadonlyArray<any> | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get references to the item at the given position in the file.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.ReferenceEntry[] | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getReferencesAtPosition(fileName: string, position: number): Promise<any[] | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get outline entries for the item at the given position in the file.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.NavigationTree | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getNavigationTree(fileName: string): Promise<any | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get changes which should be applied to format the given file.
|
|
* @param options `typescript.FormatCodeOptions`
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.TextChange[]>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getFormattingEditsForDocument(fileName: string, options: any): Promise<any[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get changes which should be applied to format the given range in the file.
|
|
* @param options `typescript.FormatCodeOptions`
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.TextChange[]>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getFormattingEditsForRange(fileName: string, start: number, end: number, options: any): Promise<any[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get formatting changes which should be applied after the given keystroke.
|
|
* @param options `typescript.FormatCodeOptions`
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.TextChange[]>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getFormattingEditsAfterKeystroke(fileName: string, postion: number, ch: string, options: any): Promise<any[]>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get other occurrences which should be updated when renaming the item at the given file and position.
|
|
* @returns `Promise<readonly typescript.RenameLocation[] | undefined>`
|
|
*/
|
|
findRenameLocations(fileName: string, positon: number, findInStrings: boolean, findInComments: boolean, providePrefixAndSuffixTextForRename: boolean): Promise<readonly any[] | undefined>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get edits which should be applied to rename the item at the given file and position (or a failure reason).
|
|
* @param options `typescript.RenameInfoOptions`
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.RenameInfo>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getRenameInfo(fileName: string, positon: number, options: any): Promise<any>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get transpiled output for the given file.
|
|
* @returns `typescript.EmitOutput`
|
|
*/
|
|
getEmitOutput(fileName: string): Promise<EmitOutput>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get possible code fixes at the given position in the file.
|
|
* @param formatOptions `typescript.FormatCodeOptions`
|
|
* @returns `Promise<ReadonlyArray<typescript.CodeFixAction>>`
|
|
*/
|
|
getCodeFixesAtPosition(fileName: string, start: number, end: number, errorCodes: number[], formatOptions: any): Promise<ReadonlyArray<any>>;
|
|
/**
|
|
* Get inlay hints in the range of the file.
|
|
* @param fileName
|
|
* @returns `Promise<typescript.InlayHint[]>`
|
|
*/
|
|
provideInlayHints(fileName: string, start: number, end: number): Promise<ReadonlyArray<any>>;
|
|
}
|
|
export const typescriptVersion: string;
|
|
export const typescriptDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export const javascriptDefaults: LanguageServiceDefaults;
|
|
export const getTypeScriptWorker: () => Promise<(...uris: Uri[]) => Promise<TypeScriptWorker>>;
|
|
export const getJavaScriptWorker: () => Promise<(...uris: Uri[]) => Promise<TypeScriptWorker>>;
|
|
}
|